Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS/QnAS (Small

Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS/QnAS (Small
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Read these instructions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this handbook and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full
attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
In this manual, the safety precautions are classified into two levels: "
WARNING" and "
CAUTION".
WARNING
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
resulting in death or severe injury.
CAUTION
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under "
CAUTION" may lead to
serious consequences.
Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety.
Make sure that the end users read this handbook and then keep the handbook in a safe place for future
reference.
[Design Precautions]
WARNING
● Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system
operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable
controller. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
(1) Emergency stop circuits, protection circuits, and protective interlock circuits for conflicting
operations (such as forward/reverse rotations or upper/lower limit positioning) must be
configured external to the programmable controller.
(2) When the programmable controller detects an abnormal condition, it stops the operation and all
outputs are:
Overcurrent or overvoltage protection of the power supply
module is activated.
The CPU module detects an error such as a watchdog
timer error by the self-diagnostic function.
Q series module
A/AnS series module
All outputs are turned off
All outputs are turned off
All outputs are held or turned off
according to the parameter setting.
All outputs are turned off
All outputs may be turned on if an error occurs in a part, such as an I/O control part, where the
CPU module cannot detect any error. To ensure safety operation in such a case, provide a safety
mechanism or a fail-safe circuit external to the programmable controller. For a fail-safe circuit
example, refer to "General Safety Requirements" in the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware
Design, Maintenance and Inspection).
(3) Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of an output module relay or transistor. Configure
an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident.
A-1
[Design Precautions]
WARNING
● In an output circuit, when a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a
load short-circuit flows for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an
external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
● Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power
supply. If the external power supply is turned on first, an accident may occur due to an incorrect
output or malfunction.
● For the operating status of each station after a communication failure, refer to manuals relevant to
the network. Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an
accident.
● When changing data of the running programmable controller from a peripheral connected to the
CPU module or from a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module or special
function module, configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the entire
system will always operate safely.
For other forms of control (such as program modification or operating status change) of a running
programmable controller, read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe
before proceeding.
Especially, when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device, immediate
action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication
failure.
To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program, and determine corrective
actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication
failure.
CAUTION
● Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power
cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction
due to noise.
● When a device such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve is controlled through an output module, a
large current (approximately ten times greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from
off to on. Take measures such as replacing the module with one having a sufficient current rating.
● After the CPU module is powered on or is reset, the time taken to enter the RUN status varies
depending on the system configuration, parameter settings, and/or program size. Design circuits so
that the entire system will always operate safely, regardless of the time.
A-2
[Installation Precautions]
CAUTION
● Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection). Failure to do so may result
in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the product.
● To mount the module, while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the
module, fully insert the module fixing projection(s) into the hole(s) in the base unit and press the
module until it snaps into place. Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction, failure or drop of the
module.
When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations, fix the module
with a screw. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause drop of the screw, short circuit, or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.
● When using an extension cable, connect it to the extension cable connector of the base unit
securely. Check the connection for looseness. Poor contact may cause incorrect input or output.
● When using a memory card, fully insert it into the memory card slot. Check that it is inserted
completely. Poor contact may cause malfunction.
● When using an SD memory card, fully insert it into the SD memory card slot. Check that it is inserted
completely. Poor contact may cause malfunction.
● Securely insert an extended SRAM cassette into the cassette connector of a CPU module. After
insertion, close the cassette cover to prevent the cassette from coming off. Poor contact may cause
malfunction.
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing the
module. Failure to do so may result in damage to the product.
A module can be replaced online (while power is on) on any MELSECNET/H remote I/O station or in
the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online, and each module has its
predetermined replacement procedure.
For details, refer to the relevant sections in the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design,
Maintenance and Inspection) and in the manual for the corresponding module.
● Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module, memory card,
SD memory card, or extended SRAM cassette. Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the
module.
● When using a Motion CPU module and modules designed for motion control, check that the
combinations of these modules are correct before applying power. The modules may be damaged if
the combination is incorrect. For details, refer to the user's manual for the Motion CPU module.
A-3
[Wiring Precautions]
WARNING
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before wiring. Failure to do so
may result in electric shock or damage to the product.
● After wiring, attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
CAUTION
● Individually ground the FG and LG terminals of the programmable controller with a ground
resistance of 100 ohms or less. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.
● Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range. If any spade
solderless terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose, resulting
in failure.
● Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module, and connect the cables
correctly. Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a
fire or failure.
● Connectors for external devices must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the
manufacturer, or must be correctly soldered. Incomplete connections may cause short circuit, fire, or
malfunction.
● Securely connect the connector to the module. Poor contact may cause malfunction.
● Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power
cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction
due to noise.
● Place the cables in a duct or clamp them. If not, dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled,
resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact.
A-4
[Wiring Precautions]
CAUTION
● Place the cables in a duct or clamp them. If not, dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled,
resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact.
● Check the interface type and correctly connect the cable. Incorrect wiring (connecting the cable to an
incorrect interface) may cause failure of the module and external device.
● Tighten the terminal screw within the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause short circuit, fire, or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.
● Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module.
Such foreign matter can cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.
● A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter, such as wire chips,
from entering the module during wiring.
Do not remove the film during wiring.
Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation.
● When disconnecting the cable from the module, do not pull the cable by the cable part. For the cable
with connector, hold the connector part of the cable. For the cable connected to the terminal block,
loosen the terminal screw. Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or
damage to the module or cable.
● Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels.
Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay
terminal block.
Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by maintenance personnel
who is familiar with protection against electric shock. (For wiring methods, refer to the QCPU User's
Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)).
A-5
[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]
WARNING
● Do not touch any terminal while power is on.
Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction.
● Correctly connect the battery connector.
Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire. Also, do not
expose it to liquid or strong shock. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, ignite, or
leak, resulting in injury and fire.
● Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before cleaning the module or
retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
CAUTION
● Before performing online operations (especially, program modification, forced output, and operation
status change) for the running CPU module from the peripheral connected, read relevant manuals
carefully and ensure the safety.
Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.
● Do not disassemble or modify the modules.
Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire.
● Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS (Personal Handy-phone
System) more than 25cm away in all directions from the programmable controller.
Failure to do so may cause malfunction.
● Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing the
module. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
A module can be replaced online (while power is on) on any MELSECNET/H remote I/O station or in
the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online, and each module has its
predetermined replacement procedure.
For details, refer to the relevant sections in the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design,
Maintenance and Inspection) and in the manual for the corresponding module.
● After the first use of the product, do not mount/remove the module to/from the base unit, and the
terminal block to/from the module, and do not insert/remove the extended SRAM cassette to/from
the CPU module more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant) respectively. Exceeding the limit may
cause malfunction.
● After the first use of the product, do not insert/remove the SD memory card to/from the CPU module
more than 500 times. Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction.
● Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module.
Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.
If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it, dispose of it without using.
● Before handling the module, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from
the human body.
Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
A-6
[Disposal Precautions]
CAUTION
● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.
When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the QCPU User's Manual
(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection).)
[Transportation Precautions]
CAUTION
● When transporting lithium batteries, follow the transportation regulations.
(For details of the regulated models, refer to the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design,
Maintenance and Inspection).)
A-7
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
(1) Mitsubishi programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions;
i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major
or serious accident; and
ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of
the PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.
(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general
industries.
MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT,
WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR
LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR
USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS,
OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI'S USER, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY
MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT.
("Prohibited Application")
Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in;
• Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any
other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT.
• Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of
a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User.
• Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as
Elevator and Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation,
Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or
Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a
significant risk of injury to the public or property.
Notwithstanding the above, restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the
PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT
is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no
special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general
specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi
representative in your region.
A-8
REVISIONS
* The handbook number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date
* Handbook Number
Apr., 2005
L(NA)-08050ENG-A
Oct., 2005
L(NA)-08050ENG-B
Revision
First edition
Addition
Appendix 1
Partial correction
Contents, Chapter 1, Section 3.1, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.3, Section 3.4,
Section 3.5, Section 3.6.1, Section 3.6.2, Section 4.1, Section 4.2,
Appendix 1Appendix 2
May, 2006
L(NA)-08050ENG-C
Addition
Chapter 4
Partial correction
Contents, Chapter 1, Section 2.1, Section 2.7, Section 3.1,
Chapter 4Chapter 5, Appendix 1, Appendix 2
Mar., 2008
L(NA)-08050ENG-D
Partial correction
Term revision (whole), Appendix 2.1
Nov., 2012
L(NA)-08050ENG-E
Model Addition
MELSEC-AnS/QnAS series
Addition
Section 1.2, Appendix 2
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Chapter 1 to 9, Appendix
Mar., 2015
L(NA)-08050ENG-F
Addition
Chapter 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section
1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 2.7, 4.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.5.2, 11.1, Appendix 3.1, 3.2
Japanese Handbook Version L-08049-G
This handbook confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may
occur as a result of using the contents noted in this handbook.
© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A-9
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................................................A - 1
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT .................................................................................................A - 8
REVISIONS ......................................................................................................................................................A - 9
CONTENTS ...................................................................................................................................................A - 10
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...................................................................................................A - 14
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1 - 1 to 1 - 5
1.1
Replacement of Modules Introduced in This Handbook .................................................................. 1 - 1
1.2
Basic Precautions ............................................................................................................................ 1 - 5
CHAPTER 2 SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
2 - 1 to 2 - 35
2.1
List of Serial Communication Modules to be Replaced ................................................................... 2 - 1
2.2
Performance Specifications Comparison ......................................................................................... 2 - 2
2.2.1
2.2.2
Module performance comparison ............................................................................................. 2 - 2
Cable specifications comparison .............................................................................................. 2 - 9
2.3
Function Comparison ..................................................................................................................... 2 - 13
2.4
Switch Setting Comparison ............................................................................................................ 2 - 15
2.5
Program Comparison ..................................................................................................................... 2 - 20
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.6
I/O signal ................................................................................................................................. 2 - 20
Buffer memory ........................................................................................................................ 2 - 23
Reuse of Existing Programs .......................................................................................................... 2 - 26
2.6.1
2.6.2
Reuse of A/AnS series programs ........................................................................................... 2 - 26
Reuse of QnA/QnAS series programs .................................................................................... 2 - 28
2.7
Other Precaution ............................................................................................................................ 2 - 29
2.8
Program Examples ........................................................................................................................ 2 - 30
CHAPTER 3 ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3 - 1 to 3 - 35
3.1
List of Ethernet Interface Modules to be Replaced .......................................................................... 3 - 1
3.2
Performance Specifications Comparison ......................................................................................... 3 - 2
3.2.1
3.2.2
Module performance comparison ............................................................................................. 3 - 2
Cable specifications comparison .............................................................................................. 3 - 6
3.3
Function Comparison ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 7
3.4
Switch Setting Comparison ............................................................................................................ 3 - 12
3.5
Parameter Comparison .................................................................................................................. 3 - 14
3.6
Program Comparison ..................................................................................................................... 3 - 15
3.6.1
3.6.2
A - 10
I/O signal ................................................................................................................................. 3 - 15
Buffer memory ........................................................................................................................ 3 - 19
3.7
Reuse of Existing Programs .......................................................................................................... 3 - 22
3.8
Other Precaution ............................................................................................................................ 3 - 24
3.9
Program Examples ........................................................................................................................ 3 - 25
3.9.1
3.9.2
3.9.3
Initial processing ..................................................................................................................... 3 - 26
Open/close processing ........................................................................................................... 3 - 29
Communication using fixed buffer .......................................................................................... 3 - 33
CHAPTER 4 INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 - 1 to 4 - 27
4.1
List of Intelligent Communication Modules to be Replaced ............................................................. 4 - 1
4.2
Performance Specifications Comparison ......................................................................................... 4 - 2
4.2.1
4.2.2
Module performance comparison ............................................................................................. 4 - 2
Cable specifications comparison .............................................................................................. 4 - 5
4.3
Function Comparison ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
4.4
Switch Setting .................................................................................................................................. 4 - 9
4.5
Program Comparison ..................................................................................................................... 4 - 15
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.6
I/O signal ............................................................................................................................... 4 - 15
Buffer memory ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 21
Reuse of Existing Programs .......................................................................................................... 4 - 22
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51H-S3 .............................................. 4 - 22
Replacement of intelligent communication module A1SD51S ............................................... 4 - 24
Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51-S3 ................................................. 4 - 27
CHAPTER 5 AS-i MASTER MODULE REPLACEMENT
5 - 1 to 5 - 10
5.1
List of AS-i Master Modules to be Replaced .................................................................................... 5 - 1
5.2
Performance Specifications Comparison ......................................................................................... 5 - 2
5.3
Function Comparison ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 3
5.4
Program Comparison ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.5
I/O signals ................................................................................................................................. 5 - 4
Buffer memory .......................................................................................................................... 5 - 5
Program Diversion ........................................................................................................................... 5 - 8
CHAPTER 6 MULTIDROP LINK MODULE REPLACEMENT
6 - 1 to 6 - 3
6.1
List of Multidrop Link Modules to be Replaced ................................................................................ 6 - 1
6.2
Replacement Configuration Examples ............................................................................................ 6 - 2
CHAPTER 7 MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
7 - 1 to 7 - 18
7.1
List of MODBUS® Modules to be Replaced .................................................................................... 7 - 1
7.2
Performance Specifications Comparison ......................................................................................... 7 - 2
7.2.1
7.2.2
Module performance comparison ............................................................................................. 7 - 2
Cable specification comparison ................................................................................................ 7 - 3
A - 11
7.3
Function Comparison ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 4
7.4
Switch Settings Comparison ............................................................................................................ 7 - 5
7.5
Program Comparison ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 8
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.6
I/O signals ................................................................................................................................. 7 - 8
Buffer memory ........................................................................................................................ 7 - 11
Program Diversion ......................................................................................................................... 7 - 17
CHAPTER 8 DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
8 - 1 to 8 - 11
8.1
List of DeviceNet Modules to be Replaced ...................................................................................... 8 - 1
8.2
Performance Specifications Comparison ......................................................................................... 8 - 2
8.3
Function Comparison ....................................................................................................................... 8 - 3
8.4
Switch Settings Comparison ............................................................................................................ 8 - 4
8.5
Program Comparison ....................................................................................................................... 8 - 5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.6
I/O signals ................................................................................................................................. 8 - 5
Buffer memory .......................................................................................................................... 8 - 7
Program Diversion ......................................................................................................................... 8 - 10
CHAPTER 9 PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9 - 1 to 9 - 19
9.1
List of PROFIBUS-DP Modules to be Replaced .............................................................................. 9 - 1
9.2
PROFIBUS-DP Master Module Replacement ................................................................................. 9 - 2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
9.3
Performance specifications comparison ................................................................................... 9 - 2
Compatible software package (configuration software) ............................................................ 9 - 4
Function comparison ................................................................................................................ 9 - 5
Input/output signal comparison ................................................................................................. 9 - 6
Buffer memory .......................................................................................................................... 9 - 8
Program diversion ..................................................................................................................... 9 - 9
PROFIBUS-DP Slave Module Replacement ................................................................................. 9 - 12
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.3.6
Performance specifications comparison ................................................................................. 9 - 12
Function list ............................................................................................................................. 9 - 13
Parameter Setting to Master Station ....................................................................................... 9 - 14
Input/output signal comparison ............................................................................................... 9 - 15
Buffer memory comparison ..................................................................................................... 9 - 17
Program diversion ................................................................................................................... 9 - 18
CHAPTER 10 REPLACEMENT OF OTHER MODULES
10 - 1 to 10 - 2
CHAPTER 11 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
11 - 1 to 11 - 2
11.1 External Dimensions ...................................................................................................................... 11 - 1
APPENDICES
App - 1 to App - 10
Appendix 1 Spare Parts Storage ..........................................................................................................App - 1
Appendix 2 Procedure for Replacing the A1SD51S with the QD51(-R24) ...........................................App - 2
A - 12
Appendix 3 Relevant Manuals ..............................................................................................................App - 6
Appendix 3.1
Appendix 3.2
Appendix 3.3
Appendix 3.4
Replacement Handbooks ........................................................................................... App - 6
A/AnS series ............................................................................................................... App - 8
QnA/QnAS series .......................................................................................................App - 8
Q series ......................................................................................................................App - 9
A - 13
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Unless otherwise specified, this handbook uses the following generic terms and abbreviations.
Generic term/abbreviation
Series
A series
AnS series
A/AnS series
QnA series
QnAS series
QnA/QnAS series
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series
Q series
CPU module type
CPU module
Basic model QCPU
High Performance model
QCPU
Process CPU
Redundant CPU
Description
Abbreviation for large types of Mitsubishi MELSEC-A series programmable controllers
Abbreviation for compact types of Mitsubishi MELSEC-A series programmable controllers
Generic term for A series and AnS series
Abbreviation for large types of Mitsubishi MELSEC-QnA series programmable controllers
Abbreviation for compact types of Mitsubishi MELSEC-QnA series programmable controllers
Generic term for QnA series and QnAS series
Generic term for A series, AnS series, QnA series, and QnAS series
Abbreviation for Mitsubishi MELSEC-Q series programmable controllers
Generic term for A series, AnS series, QnA series, QnAS series, and Q series CPU modules
Generic term for the Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, and Q01CPU
Generic term for the Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU
* This handbook mainly explains about the Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, and Q12HCPU.
Generic term for the Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, and Q25PHCPU
Generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU
Generic term for the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU,
Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU,
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Universal model QCPU
Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, and Q100UDEHCPU
*
This handbook mainly explains about the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU,
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, and Q06UDHCPU, which can replace the AnS/QnAS series.
The specifications and functions of the Q10UDEHCPU to Q100UDEHCPU are the same as those of
the modules described above, although the program and memory capacities increase.
CPU module model
ACPU
AnSCPU
A/AnSCPU
AnNCPU
AnACPU
AnUCPU
AnN/AnACPU
AnN/AnA/AnSCPU
QnACPU
QnASCPU
QnA/QnASCPU
A/AnS/QnA/QnASCPU
QCPU
A - 14
Generic term for MELSEC-A series programmable controller CPUs
Generic term for MELSEC-AnS series programmable controller CPUs
Generic term for MELSEC-A series and MELSEC-AnS series programmable controller CPUs
Generic term for the A1NCPU, A1NCPUP21/R21, A1NCPUP21-S3, A2NCPU, A2NCPU-S1,
A2NCPUP21/R21, A2NCPUP21/R21-S1, A2NCPUP21-S3(S4), A3NCPU, A3NCPUP21/R21,
and A3NCPUP21-S3
Generic term for the A2ACPU, A2ACPU-S1, A3ACPU, A2ACPUP21/R21, A2ACPUP21/R21S1, and A3ACPUP21/R21
Generic term for the A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU, A4UCPU, A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1,
and A2USHCPU-S1
Generic term for the AnNCPU and AnACPU
Generic term for the AnNCPU, AnACPU, and AnSCPU
Generic term for MELSEC-QnA series programmable controller CPUs
Generic term for MELSEC-QnAS series programmable controller CPUs
Generic term for MELSEC-QnA series and MELSEC-QnAS series programmable controller
CPUs
Generic term for A series, AnS series, QnA series, and QnAS series programmable controller
CPUs
Generic term for MELSEC-Q series programmable controller CPUs
Generic term/abbreviation
UC24 computer link module
Description
Generic term for the A series computer link modules: AJ71UC24, A1SJ71UC24-R2,
A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-R4, A1SJ71C24PRF, A2CCPUC24, and A2CCPUC24-PRF
Generic term for the following.
AJ71QC24, AJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24-R4, A1SJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24-
Serial communication module
QnA series R2, AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2, AJ71QC24N-R4, A1SJ71QC24N1,
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2, A1SJ71QC24N, and A1SJ71QC24N-R2
Q series
QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4, QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2
Generic term for the computer connected to the serial communication module, HMI
External device
Computer
Switch setting
Data communication function
GX Configurator-SC
RS-232 (interface)
RS-422/485 (interface)
Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
Ethernet module
(Human Machine Interface), measuring instruments, ID modules, bar code reader,
controllers, other serial communication modules, and UC24
Generic term for the external devices which can communicate data by using MC
protocol or bidirectional protocol
Generic term for the intelligent function module switch setting
Generic term for the MC protocol, nonprocedural protocol, bidirectional protocol, and
predefined protocol
Generic term for the GX Configurator-SC (SW0D5C-QSCU or later)
Abbreviation for the interfaces which are compliant with RS-232
Abbreviation for the interfaces which are compliant with RS-422 and RS-485
Generic term for the Q03UDVCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU,
Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDVCPU,
Q26UDPVCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, and Q100UDEHCPU
Generic term for the following Ethernet interface modules.
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71NA/AnS
B5T, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71Nseries
B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5T
AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2,
QnA series AJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-
A1SJ71AS92
QJ71AS92
Multidrop link module
B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T
Q series
QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2
Abbreviation for the A1SJ71AS92 AS-i master module
Abbreviation for the QJ71AS92 AS-i master module
Generic term for the AJ71C22(S1) when the multidrop link function is set to the
AJ71UC24/A1SJ71UC24-R4/A0J2-C214-S3
A - 15
1
INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION
1
1.1 Replacement of Modules Introduced in This Handbook
This section outlines the replacement of the following communication modules.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A/AnS series computer link module
QnA/QnAS series serial communication module
A/AnS series Ethernet interface module
QnA/QnAS series Ethernet interface module
A/AnS intelligent communication module
AnS series AS-i master module
A/AnS series multidrop link module
A/AnS series MODBUS® module
A/AnS series DeviceNet module
A/AnS series PROFIBUS-DP module
Other modules
: Refer to CHAPTER 2.
: Refer to CHAPTER 2.
: Refer to CHAPTER 3.
: Refer to CHAPTER 3.
: Refer to CHAPTER 4.
: Refer to CHAPTER 5
: Refer to CHAPTER 6
: Refer to CHAPTER 7
: Refer to CHAPTER 8
: Refer to CHAPTER 9
: Refer to CHAPTER 10
(1) Replacement of A/AnS series computer link modules and QnA/QnAS series serial
communication modules
(a) A series computer link module
Communications via RS-232
QJ71C24N
or
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485:1ch
QJ71C24N-R2
RS-232
:2ch
QJ71C24N
or
QJ71C24N-R4
QJ71C24N
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485 :1ch
QJ71C24N-R4
RS-422/485 :2ch
AJ71UC24
AJ71UC24
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485 :1ch
Communications via RS-422/485
Point
Q series communication modules do not have a function equivalent to the multidrop link function of the
A series communication module AJ71UC24.
Refer to CHAPTER 6, configure other systems.
1-1
1
INTRODUCTION
(b) AnS series computer link module
A1SJ71UC24
RS-232
Communications via
RS-232
:1ch
A1SJ71UC24-R4
Communications via
RS-422/485
RS-422/485:1ch
QJ71C24N
or
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485 :1ch
QJ71C24N-R2
RS-232
:2ch
QJ71C24N
or
QJ71C24N-R4
QJ71C24N
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485 :1ch
QJ71C24N-R4
RS-422/485 :2ch
Point
Q series communication modules do not have a function equivalent to the multidrop link function of the
AnS series communication module A1SJ71UC24.
Refer to CHAPTER 6, configure other systems.
(c) QnA series serial communication module
AJ71QC24N
or
AJ71QC24N-R2
Communications via
RS-232
QJ71C24N
or
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485:1ch
QJ71C24N-R2
RS-232
:2ch
QJ71C24N
or
QJ71C24N-R4
QJ71C24N
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485 :1ch
QJ71C24N-R4
RS-422/485 :2ch
QJ71C24N
or
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485 :1ch
QJ71C24N-R2
RS-232
:2ch
QJ71C24N
or
QJ71C24N-R4
QJ71C24N
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485 :1ch
QJ71C24N-R4
RS-422/485 :2ch
AJ71QC24N
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485 :1ch
AJ71QC24N-R2
RS-232
:2ch
AJ71QC24N
or
AJ71QC24N-R4
Communications via
RS-422/485
AJ71QC24N
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485 :1ch
AJ71QC24N-R4
RS-422
:1ch
RS-422/485 :1ch
(d) QnAS series serial communication module
A1SJ71QC24N1
or
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
Communications via
RS-232
A1SJ71QC24N1
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485 :1ch
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
RS-232
:2ch
A1SJ71QC24N1
Communications via
RS-422/485
A1SJ71QC24N1
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485 :1ch
1-2
1
INTRODUCTION
(2) Replacement of A/AnS series Ethernet interface modules and QnA/QnAS series
Ethernet interface modules
(a) A series Ethernet interface module
AJ71E71N3-T
Communications via 10BASE-T
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-100
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX:1ch
AJ71E71N3-T
10BASE-T:1ch
AJ71E71N-B5
Communications via 10BASE5
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B5
10BASE5:1ch
QJ71E71-B2
QJ71E71-B2
10BASE2:1ch
AJ71E71N-B5
10BASE5 :1ch
AJ71E71N-B2
Communications via 10BASE2
AJ71E71N-B2
10BASE2 :1ch
(b) AnS series Ethernet interface module
A1SJ71E71N3-T
Communications via 10BASE-T
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-100
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX :1ch
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B5
10BASE5 :1ch
QJ71E71-B2
QJ71E71-B2
10BASE2 :1ch
A1SJ71E71N3-T
10BASE-T :1ch
A1SJ71E71N-B5
Communications via 10BASE5
A1SJ71E71N-B5
10BASE5 :1ch
A1SJ71E71N-B2
Communications via 10BASE2
A1SJ71E71N-B2
10BASE2 :1ch
(c) QnA series Ethernet interface module
AJ71QE71N3-T
Communications via 10BASE-T
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-100
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX:1ch
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B5
10BASE5:1ch
QJ71E71-B2
QJ71E71-B2
10BASE2:1ch
AJ71QE71N3-T
10BASE-T:1ch
AJ71QE71N-B5
Communications via 10BASE5
AJ71QE71N-B5
10BASE5 :1ch
AJ71QE71N-B2
AJ71QE71N-B2
10BASE2 :1ch
1-3
Communications via 10BASE2
1
INTRODUCTION
(d) QnAS series Ethernet interface module
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
Communications via 10BASE-T
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-100
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX :1ch
Communications via 10BASE5
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B5
10BASE5 :1ch
Communications via 10BASE2
QJ71E71-B2
QJ71E71-B2
10BASE2 :1ch
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
10BASE-T :1ch
A1SJ71QE71N-B5
A1SJ71QE71N-B5
10BASE5 :1ch
A1SJ71QE71N-B2
A1SJ71QE71N-B2
10BASE2 :1ch
(3) Replacement of intelligent communication modules
(a) Intelligent communication module AD51H-S3
Communications via
RS-232
AD51H-S3
QD51
or
QD51-R24
AD51H-S3
RS-232:2ch
RS-422:1ch
Parallel:1ch
QD51
RS-232
:2ch
QD51-R24
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485:1ch
QD51-R24
Communications via
RS-422
QD51-R24
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485:1ch
(b) Intelligent communication module AD51-S3
Communications via
RS-232
AD51-S3
QD51
or
QD51-R24
QD51
RS-232
:2ch
QD51-R24
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485:1ch
AD51-S3
RS-232:2ch
RS-422:2ch
QD51-R24
Communications via
RS-422
QD51-R24
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485:1ch
(c) Intelligent communication module A1SD51S
Communications via
RS-232
A1SD51S
QD51
or
QD51-R24
QD51
RS-232
:2ch
QD51-R24
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485:1ch
A1SD51S3
RS-232:2ch
RS-422:1ch
Communications via
RS-422/485
QD51-R24
QD51-R24
RS-232
:1ch
RS-422/485:1ch
Point
• Q series intelligent communication modules do not have a parallel interface. Please consider
changing the external devices to RS-232/RS-422 interface devices.
• The BASIC program of the AD51-S3 is incompatible with that of the QD51/QD51-R24. Analyze
the existing program to create a program with AD51H-BASIC.
1-4
1
INTRODUCTION
1.2 Basic Precautions
(1) When using the sequence program of the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series on the Q series
The sequence program of the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series can be converted to be used on the Q series on
GX Developer. (On GX Works2, the sequence program of the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series cannot be
converted for the Q series.)
To convert the sequence program of the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series to be used on the Q series, use GX
Developer.
(2) When creating a new sequence program for the Q series
A sequence program can be created for the Q series on GX Developer and GX Works2.
1-5
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE
REPLACEMENT
2
2.1 List of Serial Communication Modules to be Replaced
(1) Transition of the A series to Q series
Model to be discontinued
AJ71UC24
Alternative model
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Remarks
RS-232:1ch, RS-422/485:1ch
RS-232:2ch, RS-422/485:none
RS-232:none, RS-422/485:2ch
(2) Transition of the AnS series to Q series
Model to be discontinued
A1SJ71UC24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R4
A1SCPUC24-R2*1
*1
Alternative model
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R4
QCPU + QJ71C24N or QJ71C24NR2
Remarks
RS-232:1ch, RS-422/485:1ch
RS-232:2ch, RS-422/485:none
RS-232:1ch, RS-422/485:1ch
RS-232:none, RS-422/485:2ch
Select a CPU module and serial
communication module as the
alternative model.
The A1SCPUC24-R2 is the CPU module with a built-in A1SJ71C24 function. The performance specifications of the function
are the same as the A1SJ71UC24-R2. For the performance specifications comparison of the module after replacement,
refer to Section 2.2.1 (2) with reading the A1SCPUC24-R2 as the A1SJ71UC24-R2.
(3) Transition of the QnA series to Q series
Model to be discontinued
AJ71QC24N
AJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4
Alternative model
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Remarks
RS-232:1ch, RS-422/485:1ch
RS-232:2ch, RS-422/485:none
RS-232:none, RS-422/485:2ch
(4) Transition of the QnAS series to Q series
Model to be discontinued
A1SJ71QC24N1
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
Alternative model
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
Remarks
RS-232:1ch, RS-422/485:1ch
RS-232:2ch, RS-422/485:none
2-1
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
2.2 Performance Specifications Comparison
2.2.1 Module performance comparison
(1) Comparison between A series and Q series
:Compatible,
Specifications
Item
RS-232
Interface
RS-422/485
Communication
using dedicated
Communication protocol*1
method
Non-procedural/
bidirectional
communication
Synchronization method
Transmission speed
A series
Q series
Access cycle
Error
detection
AJ71UC24
QJ71C24N*2
RS-232 compliant
(D-Sub 9P)
1ch
The connector on the
connection cable must be
changed.
RS-422/485 compliant
1ch
RS-422/485 compliant
(2-piece terminal block)
1ch
Wiring must be changed.
Half-duplex communication
Full duplex communication (1:1 connection)/
Half-duplex communication (1:n, m:n connection)
Start stop synchronization (asynchronous method)
300 to 19200 bps
50 to 230400 bps
Line
configuration
(connection)
7 or 8
Parity bit
1 (vertical parity)/none
Stop bit
1 or 2
Communication
using dedicated
protocol
One request is processed when the mounted station programmable
controller CPU executes END processing.
Non-procedural/
bidirectional
communication
Transmission can be executed at each send request,
and reception is available at all times.
Parity check
Performed (odd/even)/none
Sum check
Performed (MC protocol/Bidirectional)/none
RS-232
RS-422/485
DTR/DSR (ER/DR) control
Available
N/A
CD signal control
Available
N/A
DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) control
DC2/DC4 control
Available
Available
RS-232
1:1
RS-422/485
1 :1, 1 : n, m : n
(n:max. 32, m+n:max.32)
Communication
using dedicated
protocol
1:1, 1:n, m:n
(n:max.32, m+n:max.32)
Line
configuration
Non-procedural
(data
communication
communication)
Bidirectional
communication
Transmission
distance
1
Data bit
Transmission control
1:1, 1:n (n:max.32)
E2PROM
No. of
writes
No. of flash ROM writes
No. of occupied I/O points
1:1, 1:n, n:1 (n:max.32)
For details on linked operation
between interfaces, refer to
the manual.
1:1
RS-232
RS-422/485
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
RS-232 compliant
(D-Sub 25P)
1ch
Start bit
Data format
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Max.15m
Max.500m (overall distance)
Max.1200m (overall distance)
Max. 100,000 times on same
area in E2PROM
Max. 100,000 times on same
area in flash ROM
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment: special 32
points)
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment: intelli. 32
points)
*1
On the Q series, this is called "MELSEC communication protocol" (abbrev. "MC protocol").
*2
When the AJ71UC24 uses only the RS-232 channel, it can be replaced with the QJ71C24N-R2.
When the AJ71UC24 uses only the RS-422 channel, it can be replaced with the QJ71C24N-R4.
2-2
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Comparison between AnS series and Q series
(a) A1SJ71UC24-R2
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Specifications
Item
RS-232
AnS series
Q series
A1SJ71UC24-R2
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
RS-232 compliant (D-Sub 9P)
1ch
RS-232 compliant (D-Sub 9P)
QJ71C24N: 1ch
QJ71C24N-R2: 2ch
-
RS-422/485 compliant
(2-piece terminal block)
QJ71C24N: 1ch
QJ71C24N-R2: none
Interface
RS-422/485
Communication
using dedicated
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
-
Half-duplex communication
protocol*1
Communication
method
Non-procedural/
bidirectional
communication
Synchronization method
Transmission speed
Start stop synchronization (asynchronous method)
300 to 19200 bps
50 to 230400 bps
Start bit
Data format
Access cycle
Error
detection
1
Data bit
7 or 8
Parity bit
1 (vertical parity)/none
Stop bit
1 or 2
Communication
using dedicated
protocol
One request is processed when the mounted station programmable
controller CPU executes END processing.
Non-procedural/
bidirectional
communication
Transmission can be executed at each send request,
and reception is available at all times.
Parity check
Performed (odd/even)/none
Sum check
Performed (MC protocol/Bidirectional)/none
Transmission control
Line
configuration
(connection)
RS-232
RS-422/485
DTR/DSR (ER/DR) control
Available
N/A
CD signal control
Available
N/A
DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) control
DC2/DC4 control
Available
Available
RS-232
RS-422/485
1:1
Line
configuration
Non-procedural
(data
communication
communication)
Bidirectional
communication
1:1, 1:n, m:n
(n:max.32, m+n:max.32)
1:1, 1:n (n:max.32)
RS-422/485
No. of occupied I/O points
1:1, 1:n, n:1 (n:max.32)
For details on linked operation
between interfaces, refer to
the manual.
1:1
RS-232
No. of E2PROM writes
No. of flash ROM writes
*1
1 :1, 1 : n, m : n
(n:max. 32, m+n:max.32)
-
Communication
using dedicated
protocol
Transmission
distance
Full duplex communication (1:1
connection)/
Half-duplex communication (1:n,
m:n connection)
Full duplex communication (1:1
connection)
Max.15m
Max. 100,000 times on same
Max.1200m
(overall distance)
area in E2PROM
Max. 100,000 times on same
area in flash ROM
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment: special 32
points)
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment: intelli. 32
points)
On the Q series, this is called "MELSEC communication protocol" (abbrev. "MC protocol").
2-3
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(b) A1SJ71UC24-R4
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Specifications
Item
RS-232
AnS series
Q series
A1SJ71UC24-R4
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R4
-
RS-232 compliant
(D-Sub 9P)
QJ71C24N: 1ch
QJ71C24N-R4: none
RS-422/485 compliant
1ch
RS-422/485 compliant
(2-piece terminal block)
QJ71C24N: 1ch
(2-piece plug-in connector
socket block)
QJ71C24N-R4: 2ch
Interface
RS-422/485
Communication
using dedicated
Communication protocol*1
method
Non-procedural/
bidirectional
communication
Synchronization method
Transmission speed
Access cycle
Error
detection
Line
configuration
(connection)
Start stop synchronization (asynchronous method)
300 to 19200 bps
50 to 230400 bps
7 or 8
1 (vertical parity)/none
Stop bit
1 or 2
Communication
using dedicated
protocol
One request is processed when the mounted station programmable
controller CPU executes END processing.
Non-procedural/
bidirectional
communication
Transmission can be executed at each send request,
and reception is available at all times.
Parity check
Performed (odd/even)/none
Sum check
Performed (MC protocol/Bidirectional)/none
DTR/DSR (ER/DR) control
Available
N/A
CD signal control
Available
N/A
DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) control
DC2/DC4 control
Available
Available
-
1:1
Communication
using dedicated
protocol
1:1, 1:n, m:n
(n:max.32, m+n:max.32)
RS-232
RS-422/485
No. of occupied I/O points
2-4
RS-422/485
RS-422/485
No. of E2PROM writes
No. of flash ROM writes
*1
RS-232
1 :1, 1 : n, m : n
(n:max. 32, m+n:max.32)
Line
configuration
Non-procedural
(data
communication
communication)
Bidirectional
communication
Transmission
distance
1
Parity bit
RS-232
The wiring must be changed.
Full duplex communication (1:1 connection)/
Half-duplex communication (1:n, m:n connection)
Data bit
Transmission control
-
Half-duplex communication
Start bit
Data format
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
1:1, 1:n (n:max.32)
1:1, 1:n, n:1 (n:max.32)
1:1
-
Max.15m
Max.500m
(overall distance)
Max.1200m
(overall distance)
Max. 100,000 times on same
area in E2PROM
Max. 100,000 times on same
area in flash ROM
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment: special 32
points)
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment: intelli. 32
points)
On the Q series, this is called "MELSEC communication protocol" (abbrev. "MC protocol").
For details on linked operation
between interfaces, refer to
the manual.
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(3) Comparison between QnA series and Q series
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Specifications
QnA series
Q series
AJ71QC24N
AJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
RS-232
RS-232 compliant
(D-Sub 25P)
AJ71QC24N: 1ch
AJ71QC24N-R2: 2ch
AJ71QC24N-R4: none
RS-232 compliant
(D-Sub 9P)
QJ71C24N: 1ch
QJ71C24N-R2: 2ch
QJ71C24N-R4: none
RS-422
RS-422 compliant
(D-Sub 25P)
AJ71QC24N: none
AJ71QC24N-R2: none
AJ71QC24N-R4: 1ch
-
RS-422/485
RS-422/485 compliant
(2-piece terminal block)
AJ71QC24N: 1ch
AJ71QC24N-R2: none
AJ71QC24N-R4: 1ch
RS-422/485 compliant
(2-piece terminal block)
QJ71C24N: 1ch
QJ71C24N-R2: none
(2-piece plug-in connector socket
block)
QJ71C24N-R4: 2ch
Item
Interface
Communication
using dedicated
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
The connector on the
connection cable must be
changed.
×
The Q series does not have the
RS-422 interface of the D-Sub
25P.
Wiring must be changed.
Half-duplex communication
protocol*1
Non-procedural
protocol
communication
Full duplex communication/Half-duplex communication
Bidirectional
protocol
communication
Full duplex communication/Half-duplex communication
Synchronization method
Transmission speed
Start stop synchronization (asynchronous method)
300 to 230400 bps
Start bit
Data format
Data bit
7 or 8
Parity bit
1 (vertical parity)/none
Stop bit
1 or 2
Communication
using dedicated
protocol
Access cycle
Non-procedural
protocol
communication
Bidirectional
protocol
communication
Error
detection
50 to 230400 bps
1
Processing when the mounted station programmable controller CPU
performs END processing
Transmission can be executed at each send request,
and reception is available at all times.
Parity check
Performed (odd/even)/none
Sum check
Performed/none
RS-232
Transmission control
Select at parameter/user frame.
RS-422 RS-422/485
DTR/DSR (ER/DR) control
Available Available
N/A
RS/CS control
Available
N/A
N/A
CD signal control
Available
N/A
N/A
DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) control Available Available
DC2/DC4 control
Line
configuration
(connection)
RS-232
RS-422
RS-422/485
Available
1:1
1:1
-
1:1, 1:n, m:n
(n:max.32, m+n:max.32)
1:1, 1:n, n:1, m:n
(n:max.32, m+n:max.32)
The Q series does not have the
RS-422 interface.
Transmission control must be
changed to the transmission
control of the interface to be
used.
The Q series does not have the
RS-422 interface.
The interface to be used must
be changed.
(Continued on next page)
2-5
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Specifications
Item
Communication
using dedicated
protocol
line
Non-procedural
configuration
protocol
(data
communication
communication)
Bidirectional
protocol
communication
QnA series
Q series
AJ71QC24N
AJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
1:1, 1:n, m:n
(n:max.32, m+n:max.32)
1:1, 1:n (n:max.32)
RS-422
RS-422/485
E2PROM
No. of
writes
No. of flash ROM writes
No. of occupied I/O points
*1
2-6
1:1, 1:n, n:1 (n:max.32)
For details on linked operation
between interfaces, refer to
the manual.
-
The Q series does not have
the RS-422 interface.
The interface to be used must
be changed.
1:1
RS-232
Transmission
distance
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
Max.15m
Max.1200m
Max.1200m (overall distance)
Max. 100,000 times on same
area in E2PROM
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment: special 32
points)
Max. 100,000 times on same
area in flash ROM
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment: intelli. 32 points)
On the Q series, this is called "MELSEC communication protocol" (abbrev. "MC protocol").
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(4) Comparison between QnAS series and Q series
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Specifications
Item
RS-232
RS-422/485
QnAS series
Q series
A1SJ71QC24N1
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
RS-232 compliant (D-Sub 9P)
A1SJ71QC24N1: 1ch
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2: 2ch
RS-232 compliant (D-Sub 9P)
QJ71C24N: 1ch
QJ71C24N-R2: 2ch
QJ71C24N-R4: none
RS-422/485 compliant
(2-piece terminal block)
A1SJ71QC24N1: 1ch
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2: none
RS-422/485 compliant
(2-piece terminal block)
QJ71C24N: 1ch
QJ71C24N-R2: none
(2-piece plug-in connector socket
block)
QJ71C24N-R4: 2ch
Interface
Communication
using dedicated
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
Wiring must be changed.
Half-duplex communication
protocol*1
Non-procedural
protocol
communication
Full duplex communication/Half-duplex communication
Bidirectional
protocol
communication
Full duplex communication/Half-duplex communication
Synchronization method
Transmission speed
Start stop synchronization (asynchronous method)
300 to 115200 bps
50 to 230400 bps
Start bit
Data format
Data bit
7 or 8
Parity bit
1 (vertical parity)/none
Stop bit
1 or 2
Communication
using dedicated
protocol
Access cycle
Non-procedural
protocol
communication
Bidirectional
protocol
communication
Error
detection
1
Processing when the mounted station programmable controller CPU
performs END processing
Transmission can be executed at each send request,
and reception is available at all times.
Parity check
Performed (odd/even)/none
Sum check
Performed/none
Select at parameter/user frame.
RS-232 RS-422/485
Transmission control
DTR/DSR (ER/DR) control
Available
N/A
RS/CS control
Available
N/A
CD signal control
Available
N/A
DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) control
Available
DC2/DC4 control
Line
configuration
(connection)
RS-232
RS-422/485
Available
1:1
1:1, 1:n, m:n
(n:max.32, m+n:max.32)
1:1, 1:n, n:1, m:n
(n:max.32, m+n:max.32)
(Continued on next page)
2-7
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Specifications
Item
Communication
using dedicated
protocol
line
Non-procedural
configuration
protocol
(data
communication
communication)
Bidirectional
protocol
communication
Transmission
distance
No. of E2PROM writes
No. of flash ROM writes
No. of occupied I/O points
*1
2-8
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
1:1, 1:n, m:n
(n:max.32, m+n:max.32)
1:1, 1:n (n:max.32)
1:1, 1:n, n:1 (n:max.32)
1:1
RS-232
RS-422/485
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
A1SJ71QC24N1
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
Max.15m
Max.1200m (overall distance)
Max. 100,000 times on same
area in E2PROM
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment: special 32
points)
Max. 100,000 times on same
area in flash ROM
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment: intelli. 32 points)
On the Q series, this is called "MELSEC communication protocol" (abbrev. "MC protocol").
For details on linked operation
between interfaces, refer to
the manual.
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
2.2.2 Cable specifications comparison
(1) Comparison between A series and Q series
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Specifications
A series
Q series
AJ71UC24
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Item
Cable
Use a cable that is compliant with the RS-232 standard.*1
Cable length
RS-232
Applicable
connector for
external wiring
(side of
connection cable
for connecting to
the module)
Max.15m
D-Sub 25P
(male, screw type)
(mating screw M2.6)
D-Sub 9P*2
(male, screw type)
(mating screw M2.6)
Item
Description
Cable type
Shielded cable
Number of pairs
3P
Conductor resistance (20 )
88.0 /km or less
Insulation resistance
10000 M -km or less
Cable
RS-422/485
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
Dielectric withstand voltage
500 VDC for 1 minute
Electrostatic capacitance (1kHz)
Average 60nF/km or less
Characteristic impedance
(100kHz)
110 10
The connector must be
changed.
*1
Cable length
External wiring
(side of
connection cable
for connecting to
the module)
Max.500m
(overall distance)
Max.1200m
(overall distance)
Connected to terminal block
For details on the connection
method, refer to the manual.
*1
The RS-232 and RS-422/485 recommended cables are listed in the Q series serial communication module manual.
*2
Use the exclusive products listed in the Q series serial communication module manual as the connector shell of the cable to
connect to the Q series serial communication module.
2-9
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Comparison between AnS series and Q series
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Specifications
Item
Cable
AnS series
Q series
A1SJ71UC24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R4
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Use a cable that is compliant with the RS-232 standard.*1
Cable length
RS-232
Applicable
connector for
external wiring
(side of
connection cable
for connecting to
the module)
Max.15m
D-Sub 9P
(male, screw type)
(mating screw M2.6)
D-Sub 9P*2
(male, screw type)
(mating screw M2.6)
Item
Description
Cable type
Shielded cable
Number of pairs
3P
Conductor resistance (20 )
88.0 /km or less
Cable
RS-422/485
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
Insulation resistance
10000 M -km or less
Dielectric withstand voltage
500 VDC for 1 minute
Electrostatic capacitance (1kHz)
Average 60nF/km or less
Characteristic impedance
(100kHz)
110 10
*1
Cable length
External wiring
(side of
connection cable
for connecting to
the module)
Max.500m
(overall distance)
Connected to terminal block
For details on the connection
method, refer to the manual.
*1
The RS-232 and RS-422/485 recommended cables are listed in the Q series serial communication module manual.
*2
Use the exclusive products listed in the Q series serial communication module manual as the connector shell of the cable to
connect to the Q series serial communication module.
2 - 10
Max.1200m
(overall distance)
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(3) Comparison between QnA series and Q series
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Specifications
Item
Cable
QnA series
Q series
AJ71QC24N
AJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Use a cable that is compliant with the RS-232 standard.*1
Cable length
RS-232
Applicable
connector for
external wiring
(side of
connection cable
for connecting to
the module)
Cable
RS-422
Max.15m
D-Sub 25P
(male, screw type)
(mating screw M2.6)
D-Sub 9P*2
(male, screw type)
(mating screw M2.6)
(Same as RS-422/485)
-
Applicable
connector for
external wiring
(side of
connection cable
for connecting to
the module)
D-Sub 25P
(male, screw type)
Connected to the RS-232 or RS422/485 interface.
Item
Description
Cable type
Shielded cable
Number of pairs
3P
Conductor resistance (20 )
88.0 /km or less
Insulation resistance
10000 M -km or less
Dielectric withstand voltage
500 VDC for 1 minute
Electrostatic capacitance (1kHz)
Average 60nF/km or less
Characteristic impedance
(100kHz)
110 10
Cable
RS-422/485
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
The connector must be
changed.
The Q series does not have the
RS-422 interface.
The interface to be used must
be changed.
*1
Cable length
External wiring
(side of
connection cable
for connecting to
the module)
Max.1200m (overall distance)
Connected to terminal block
For details on the connection
method, refer to the manual.
*1
The RS-232 and RS-422/485 recommended cables are listed in the Q series serial communication module manual.
*2
Use the exclusive products listed in the Q series serial communication module manual as the connector shell of the cable to
connect to the Q series serial communication module.
2 - 11
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(4) Comparison between QnAS series and Q series
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Specifications
Item
Cable
QnAS series
Q series
A1SJ71QC24N1
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Use a cable that is compliant with the RS-232 standard.*1
Cable length
RS-232
Applicable
connector for
external wiring
(side of
connection cable
for connecting to
the module)
Max.15m
D-Sub 9P
(male, screw type)
(mating screw M2.6)
D-Sub 9P*2
(male, screw type)
(mating screw M2.6)
Item
Description
Cable type
Shielded cable
Number of pairs
3P
Conductor resistance (20 )
88.0 /km or less
Insulation resistance
10000 M -km or less
Cable
RS-422/485
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
Dielectric withstand voltage
500 VDC for 1 minute
Electrostatic capacitance (1kHz)
Average 60nF/km or less
Characteristic impedance
(100kHz)
110 10
*1
Cable length
External wiring
(side of
connection cable
for connecting to
the module)
Max.1200m (overall distance)
Connected to terminal block
*1
The RS-232 and RS-422/485 recommended cables are listed in the Q series serial communication module manual.
*2
Use the exclusive products listed in the Q series serial communication module manual as the connector shell of the cable to
connect to the Q series serial communication module.
2 - 12
For details on the connection
method, refer to the manual.
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
2.3 Function Comparison
(1) Comparison between A/AnS series and Q series
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Description
A series
Item
AJ71UC24
Communication
using dedicated
AnS series
Q series
A1SJ71UC24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R4
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Device memory
read/write
Programmable controller CPU data is read/written to and
from external devices.
The available commands,
accessible device range, and
access to another station are
restricted.
The program on the external
device side must be changed.
On-demand
Data is transmitted to external devices from the
programmable controller CPU.
Change to a sequence
program that uses the
dedicated instruction
(ONDEMAND).
protocol*1
Data transmission
Data is transmitted to external devices from the
Programmable controller
programmable controller CPU.
Non-procedural  External device
communication Data reception
Programmable controller Data is transmitted from external devices.
 External device
Data transmission
Data is transmitted to external devices from the
Programmable controller
programmable controller CPU.
 External device
Bidirectional
communication Data reception
Programmable controller Data is transmitted from external devices.
 External device
Transmission using printer function
DTR/DSR control
Transmission
control
*1
CompatReference
Precautions for replacement
ibility
section
CD signal control
DC code control
Transmits messages (character strings) to the printer from
the programmable controller CPU.
Change to a sequence
program that uses the
dedicated instructions
(OUTPUT/INPUT).
Section
2.6.1
Change to a sequence
program that uses the
dedicated instructions
(BIDOUT/BIDIN).
Change to a sequence
program that uses the
dedicated instruction (PRR).
Transmitted by nonprocedural
protocol using user frames.
Data transmission/reception with external devices is
controlled by RS-232 control signals.
DC codes (including Xon/Xoff) are sent/received to control
data transmission/reception with external devices.
On the Q series, this is called "MELSEC communication protocol" (abbrev. "MC protocol").
2 - 13
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Comparison between QnA/QnAS series and Q series
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Description
QnA series
Item
QnAS series
Q series
A1SJ71QC24N1
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Communications in
ASCII mode
Communications in dedicated protocol is performed using
ASCII data.
Communications in
binary mode
Communications in dedicated protocol is performed using
binary data.
Device memory
Communication
read/write
using dedicated
protocol*1
AJ71QC24N
AJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4
CompatReference
Precautions for replacement
ibility
section
Programmable controller CPU data is read/written to and
from external devices.
Access to another
station
Data is read/written to another station's programmable
controller CPU on the network system.
On-demand
Data is transmitted to external devices from the
programmable controller CPU.
The program on the PC side
sometimes must be changed
according to the network to
pass through.
Data transmission/
reception
Data is transmitted/received between the programmable
Programmable
controller CPU and external devices.
controller
Non-procedural
External device
protocol
Data transmission/
Data is transmitted or received using the data (user frames)
communication
reception in user frames registered to the serial communication module.
Data transmission/
reception by ASCII
binary conversion
Bidirectional
protocol
communication
Data transmission/
reception
Data is transmitted/received between the programmable
Programmable
controller CPU and external devices.
controller
External device
Data transmission/
reception by ASCII
binary conversion
Communication by dedicated link
instruction
(SEND/RECV, READ/WRITE, REQ)
DTR/DSR control
Transmission
control
RS/CS control
CD signal control
DC code control
*1
2 - 14
Binary data is converted to ASCII data before it is
transmitted.
Received ASCII data is converted to binary data.
Binary data is converted to ASCII data before it is
transmitted.
Received ASCII data is converted to binary data.
Data is transmitted/received with another
station's programmable controller CPU
on a multidrop connection by link
instructions.
-
×
Study the method for
communicating via
MELSECNET/H.
Data transmission/reception with external devices is
controlled by RS-232 control signals.
DC codes (including Xon/Xoff) are sent/received to control
data transmission/reception with external devices.
On the Q series, this is called "MELSEC communication protocol" (abbrev. "MC protocol").
Section
2.6.2
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
2.4 Switch Setting Comparison
(1) Comparison between A series and Q series
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Description
A series
Q series
AJ71UC24
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Switch name
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
Reference
section
Each of the interface modes’ setting is
determined by the data communication
function to be used.
RS-232
0
Mode switch
Station number switch
RS-422/485
Use not allowed
1
to
4
Dedicated
protocol
(format1 to 4)
5
to
8
Non-procedural
mode
or
bidirectional
mode
Non-procedural
mode
or
bidirectional
mode
Dedicated
protocol
(format1 to 4)
9
Non-procedural mode
A
to
D
Dedicated protocol (format1 to 4)
E
Use not allowed
F
Self-loopback test
Set the switch settings
in the GX Developer
PLC parameter
settings.
Refer to Section 2.4
-
(3)*1.
The station number of the module for
when date communications is performed
using dedicated protocol is set.
-
Section 2.7
SW11
Main channel
setting
The target interface of transmission
processing and reception processing is
set.
-
SW12
Data bit
setting
The data bit length of the data to be
transmitted/received is set.
-
SW13
Transmission
to
speed setting
SW15
The transmission speed for when data is
to be transmitted/received is set.
-
Parity bit
SW16 enable/disable
setting
The parity bit ON/OFF of the data to be
sent/received is set.
-
The type of parity bit to add to the data to
be transmitted/received is set.
-
The stop bit length of the data to be
transmitted/received is set.
-
Sum check
SW21 enable/disable
setting
The sum check code presence in
dedicated protocol data communications
is set.
-
Write during
SW22 RUN enable/
disable setting
Write during RUN enable/disable in
dedicated protocol data communications
is set.
-
computer link/
SW23 multidrop link
selection
The function of computer link module to
be used is set.
-
-
master/local
station setting
The station type for use of multidrop link
function is set.
-
-
Even/odd parity
Transmission SW17
setting
specification
Stop
switch
SW18
bit setting
SW24
-
There is no distinction
with the main channel
on the Q series.
Set the switch settings
in the GX Developer
PLC parameter
settings.
Refer to Section 2.4
(3)*1.
There is no multidrop
link function provided
for the Q series.
2 - 15
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Comparison between AnS series and Q series
(a) A1SJ71UC24-R2
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Description
Switch name
AnS series
Q series
A1SJ71UC24-R2
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
Reference
section
Each of the interface modes’ setting is
determined by the data communication
function to be used.
RS-232 (CH1)
Mode switch
1
to
4
Dedicated protocol (format1 to 4)
5
Non-procedural mode
or
bidirectional mode
6
to
E
Use not allowed
F
Self-loopback test
A1ADP-SP
setting
-
-
-
Write during
SW04 RUN enable/
disable setting
Write during RUN enable/disable in
dedicated protocol data communications
is set.
-
SW05
Transmission
to
speed setting
SW07
The transmission speed for when data is
to be transmitted/received is set.
-
The data bit length of the data to be
transmitted/received is set.
-
The parity bit ON/OFF of the data to be
sent/received is set.
-
Transmission SW08 Data bit setting
specification
Parity bit
switch
SW09 enable/disable
setting
SW10
Even/odd parity The type of parity bit to add to the data to
setting
be transmitted/received is set.
SW11
Stop bit setting
Sum check
SW12 enable/disable
setting
*1
Use not allowed
The station number of the module for
when date communications is performed
using dedicated protocol is set.
Station number switch
SW03
0
-
Set the switch settings
in the GX Developer
PLC parameter
Section 2.7
settings.
Refer to Section 2.4
(3)*1.
-
The stop bit length of the data to be
transmitted/received is set.
-
The sum check code presence in
dedicated protocol data communications
is set.
-
Using the A1SJ71UC24-R2 with the A1ADP-SP
When the A1SJ71UC24-R2 with the software version X or later is used, the A1ADP-SP setting can be used.
This setting is used to create a sequence program in the nonprocedural mode by using dedicated instructions for the
computer link function in the AnACPU.
When using dedicated instructions for the computer link function, switch the A1ADP-SP setting to ON. When not using
them, switch the setting to OFF.
When the A1SJ71UC24-R2 with the software version W or earlier is used, the dedicated instructions for the computer link
function cannot be used.
Create a sequence program using the FROM/TO instructions.
2 - 16
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(b) A1SJ71UC24-R4
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Description
Switch name
AnS series
Q series
A1SJ71UC24-R4
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R4
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
Reference
section
Each of the interface modes’ setting is
determined by the data communication
function to be used.
RS-422/485 (CH2)
Mode switch
0
to
3
Use not allowed
4
Non-procedural mode
or
bidirectional mode
5
to
8
Dedicated protocol (format1 to 4)
9
to
E
Use not allowed
F
Self-loopback test
(3)*1.
The station number of the module for
when date communications is performed
using dedicated protocol is set.
-
master/local
station setting
The station type for use of multidrop link
function is set.
-
computer link/
SW02 multidrop link
selection
The function of computer link module to
be used is set.
-
-
-
-
Station number switch
SW01
SW03
A1ADP-SP
setting
Write during
SW04 RUN enable/
disable setting
SW05
Transmission
Transmission to
speed setting
specification SW07
switch
SW08 Data bit setting
Parity bit
SW09 enable/disable
setting
Write during RUN enable/disable in
dedicated protocol data communications
is set.
-
The transmission speed for when data is
to be transmitted/received is set.
-
The data bit length of the data to be
transmitted/received is set.
-
The parity bit ON/OFF of the data to be
sent/received is set.
-
Even/odd parity The type of parity bit to add to the data to
SW10
setting
be transmitted/received is set.
SW11
Stop
bit setting
Sum check
SW12 enable/disable
setting
*1
Set the switch settings
in the GX Developer
PLC parameter
settings.
Refer to Section 2.4
-
-
There is no multidrop
link function provided
for the Q series.
Section 2.7
Set the switch settings
in the GX Developer
PLC parameter
settings.
Refer to Section 2.4
(3)*1.
-
The stop bit length of the data to be
transmitted/received is set.
-
The sum check code presence in
dedicated protocol data communications
is set.
-
When the A1SJ71UC24-R4 is mounted to the A1ADP-SP
When the A1SJ71UC24-R4 with the software version X or later, the A1ADP-SP setting can be used.
This setting is used to create a sequence program in the non-procedural mode by using the dedicated instructions for the
computer link function in the AnACPU.
When using the dedicated instructions for the computer link module, switch the A1ADP-SP setting to ON. When not using
them, switch the setting to OFF.
When the A1SJ71UC24-R4 with the software version W or earlier is used, the dedicated instructions for the computer link
function cannot be used.
Create a sequence program using the FROM/TO instructions.
2 - 17
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(3) Comparison between QnA/QnAS series and Q series
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Description
QnA series
Switch name
AJ71QC24N
AJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4
Q series
A1SJ71QC24N1
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Mode switch
Each of the interface modes’ setting is
determined by the data communication
function to be used.
0: (For independent operation/linked
operation)
1: Dedicated protocol (format 1)
2: Dedicated protocol (format 2)
3: Dedicated protocol (format 3)
4: Dedicated protocol (format 4)
5: Dedicated protocol (format 5)
6: Nonprocedural protocol
7: Bidirectional protocol
8 to D: Setting unavailable
E: ROM/RAM/switch test
F: Self-loopback test
-
Station number switch
The station number of the module for
when data communications is performed
using dedicated protocol is set.
-
Operation (independent operation/linked
operation) of the two interfaces is set.
-
SW02 Data bit setting
The data bit length of the data to be
transmitted/received is set.
-
Parity bit
SW03 enable/disable
setting
The parity bit ON/OFF of the data to be
sent/received is set.
-
SW01
SW04
Operation
setting
Even/odd parity The type of parity bit to add to the data to
setting
be transmitted/received is set.
The sum check code ON/OFF in
dedicated protocol/bidirectional protocol
data communications is set.
-
Write during RUN enable/disable in
dedicated protocol data communications
is set.
-
Setting change
SW08 enable/disable
setting
Mode switching and E2PROM write
enabled/disabled are set.
-
SW09
Transmission
to
speed setting
SW12
The transmission speed for when data is
to be transmitted/received is set.
-
SW13
to
SW15
(All switches are set to OFF.)
-
-
Precautions for
replacement
Reference
section
Set the switch settings
in the GX Developer
PLC parameter
-
Sum check
Transmission
SW06 enable/disable
specification
setting
switch
Write during
SW07 RUN enable/
disable setting
Compatibility
settings.*1
The stop bit length of the data to be
transmitted/received is set.
SW05 Stop bit setting
2 - 18
QnAS series
-
Section 2.7
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
*1
The Q series serial communication module switch setting is set in the GX Developer PLC parameter settings.
2 - 19
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
2.5 Program Comparison
2.5.1 I/O signal
(1) Comparison between A/AnS series and Q series
There is no compatibility in the I/O signal assignments between the A/AnS series and the Q series.
Make a new sequence program.
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Signal name
Input signal
A series
AnS series
AJ71UC24
A1SJ71UC24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R4
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
Xn0
Transmission complete
On the Q series, Xn0, Xn1, Xn7, and Xn8 are used as the transmission
complete signals.
Xn1
Receive data read request
On the Q series, Xn3, Xn4, XnA, and XnB are used as the read request,
receive data, and read request signals.
Xn2
Global signal
Xn3
Xn4
Xn5
Xn6
Xn7
On the Q series, X(n+1)A and X(n+1)B are used as global signals.
On-demand in execution
Transmission complete of on-demand data is confirmed by the complete
device of the ONDEMAND instruction.
Computer link module
Transmission sequence status
The status is confirmed by the transmission sequence state storage area
(addresses: 597(256H), 613(265H)) in buffer memory.
Computer link module ready
Xn8
Use prohibited
Xn9
Mode switching complete
XnA
On the Q series, X(n+1)E is used as the ready signal.
On the Q series, Xn8 is used as the abnormal completion of transmission
signal.
On the Q series, Xn6 is used as the mode switching complete signal.
On the Q series, XnA and XnB are used as signals for various applications.
(Refer to Section 2.5.1 (2).)
Use prohibited
XnB
XnC
Use prohibited
XnD
Watchdog timer
On the Q series, X(n+1)F is used as the watchdog timer signal.
XnE
to
X(n+1)F
Use prohibited
On the Q series, XnE to X(n+1)F are used as signals for various applications.
(Refer to Section 2.5.1 (2).)
Signal name
Output signal
A series
AnS series
AJ71UC24
A1SJ71UC24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R4
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
Yn0
to
YnF
Use prohibited
On the Q series, Yn0 to YnF are used as signals for various applications.
(Refer to Section 2.5.1 (2).)
Y(n+1)0
Send request
On the Q series, Yn0 and Yn7 are used as the send request signals.
Y(n+1)1
Receive data read complete
Y(n+1)2
to
Y(n+1)8
Use prohibited
Y(n+1)9
Mode switching request
Y(n+1)A
Y(n+1)B
Y(n+1)C
Y(n+1)F
2 - 20
On the Q series, Y(n+1)2 to Y(n+1)8 are used as signals for various
applications. (Refer to Section 2.5.1 (2).)
On the Q series, Yn2 and Yn9 are used as the mode switching request signals.
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
Y(n+1)D
Y(n+1)E
On the Q series, Yn1 and Yn8 are used as the receive data read complete
signals.
Use prohibited
On the Q series, Y(n+1)C is used as the system setting default request signal.
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Comparison between QnA/QnAS series and Q series
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Signal name
QnA series
Input signal
AJ71QC24N
AJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4
QnAS series
Q series
A1SJ71QC24N1
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Xn0
Normal completion of transmission
Normal completion of
transmission
Xn1
Abnormal completion of transmission
Abnormal completion of
transmission
CH1
CH1
Xn2
Transmission processing in progress
Transmission processing in
progress
Xn3
Receive data read request
Receive data read request
Xn4
Receive error detection
Receive error detection
Xn5
(System use)
(System use)
Xn6
CH1 mode switching
CH1 mode switching
Xn7
Normal completion of transmission
Normal completion of
transmission
Xn8
Abnormal completion of transmission
Abnormal completion of
transmission
CH2
CH2
Xn9
Transmission processing in progress
Transmission processing in
progress
XnA
Receive data read request
Receive data read request
XnB
Receive error detection
Receive error detection
XnC
(System use)
(System use)
XnD
CH2 mode switching
CH2 mode switching
XnE
CH1 ERR.LED ON
CH1 error.
XnF
CH2 ERR.LED ON
CH2 error.
X(n+1)0
Modem initialization completion
Modem initialization completion
X(n+1)1
Dialing
Dialing
X(n+1)2
Connecting
Line connection
X(n+1)3
Abnormal completion of initialization/connection
Initialization, line connection failure
X(n+1)4
Modem disconnection completion
Line disconnection completion
X(n+1)5
Normal completion of notification
Normal completion of notification
X(n+1)6
Abnormal completion of notification
Abnormal completion of notification
X(n+1)7
2
E PROM read complete
2
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
Flash ROM read complete
X(n+1)8
E PROM write complete
Flash ROM write complete
X(n+1)9
E2PROM system setting write complete
Flash ROM system setting completion
X(n+1)A
CH1 global signal
CH1 global signal
X(n+1)B
CH2 global signal
CH2 global signal
X(n+1)C
System setting default completion
System setting default completion
X(n+1)D
(System use)
(System use)
X(n+1)E
QC24N ready signal (accessible)
C24 ready signal
X(n+1)F
Watchdog timer
Watchdog timer
2 - 21
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
:Compatible,
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Signal name
QnA series
Output signal
AJ71QC24N
AJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4
Yn0
Yn1
QnAS series
Q series
A1SJ71QC24N1
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Send request
CH1
Receive data read complete
Yn2
Send request
CH1
Mode switching request
Receive data read complete
Mode switching request
Yn3
Yn4
Use prohibited
Yn5
Use prohibited
Yn6
Yn7
Yn8
Send request
CH2
Receive data read complete
Yn9
Mode switching request
Send request
CH2
Receive data read complete
Mode switching request
YnA
YnB
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
YnE
CH1 ERR.LED OFF request
CH1 side error information initialization
request
YnF
CH2 ERR.LED OFF request
CH2 side error information initialization
request
Y(n+1)0
Modem initialization request
Modem initialization request
Y(n+1)1
Connection request
Line connection request
Y(n+1)2
Modem disconnection request
Line disconnection request
YnC
YnD
Y(n+1)3
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
Y(n+1)4
Notification issue request
Notification issue request
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
Y(n+1)5
Y(n+1)6
2PROM
Y(n+1)7
E
read request
Flash ROM read request
Y(n+1)8
E2PROM write request
Flash ROM write request
Y(n+1)9
E2PROM system setting write request
Flash ROM system setting request
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
System setting default request
System setting default request
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
Y(n+1)A
Y(n+1)B
Y(n+1)C
Y(n+1)D
Y(n+1)E
Y(n+1)F
2 - 22
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
2.5.2 Buffer memory
(1) Comparison between A/AnS series and Q series
There is no compatibility in the buffer memory assignments between the A/AnS series and the Q series.
Make a new sequence program.
The table below shows the main assignment areas for the initial settings and for transmission/reception.
:Compatible,
Buffer memory address
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Buffer memory name
A series
AnS series
AJ71UC24
A1SJ71UC24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R4
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
HEX
DEC
0H
0
Non-procedural send data count storage
area
1H to 7FH
1 to 127
Send data storage area
80H
128
Non-procedural receive data count
storage area
81H to FFH
129 to 255
Receive data storage area
100H
256
Non-procedural receive end code
specification
to
to
to
103H
259
Non-procedural word/byte specification
area
104H
260
Non-procedural send buffer memory
head address specification area
as the send buffer memory head address specification area.*1
105H
261
Non-procedural send buffer memory
length specification area
as the send buffer memory length specification area.*1
106H
262
Non-procedural receive buffer memory
head address specification area
107H
Non-procedural receive buffer memory
length specification area
108H
264
Non-procedural receive end data count
specification area
109H
265
On-demand buffer memory head
address specification area
10AH
266
On-demand length specification area
10BH
267
RS-232 CD terminal check setting area
268 to 3583
-
10CH to
DFFH
*1
263
On the Q series, the area of address 400H, 800H (1024, 2048) is
used as the send data count specification area.
On the Q series, the area from address 401H, 801H (1025, 2049)
is used as the send data specification area.
On the Q series, the area of address 600H, A00H (1536, 2560) is
used as the receive data count specification area.
On the Q series, the area from address 601H, A01H (1537, 2561)
is used as the receive data storage area.
On the Q series, the area of address A5H, 145H (165, 325) is used
as the receive end code specification area.
On the Q series, the area from address 101H (257) onward is
used for various applications.
On the Q series, the area of 96H, 136H (150, 310) is used as the
word/byte unit specification area.*1
On the Q series, the area of address A2H, 142H (162, 322) is used
On the Q series, the area of address A3H, 143H (163, 323) is used
On the Q series, the area of address A6H, 146H (166, 326) is used
as the receive buffer memory head address specification area.*1
On the Q series, the area of address A7H, 147H (167, 327) is used
as the receive buffer memory buffer memory length specification
area.*1
On the Q series, the area of address A4H, 144H (164, 324) is used
as the receive end data count specification area.*1
On the Q series, the area of address A0H, 140H (160, 320) is used
as the on-demand buffer memory head address specification
area.*1
On the Q series, the area of address A1H, 141H (161, 321) is used
as the on-demand data length specification area.*1
On the Q series, the area of 97H, 137H (151, 311) is used as the
CD terminal check specification area.*1
On the Q series, the area from address 10CH (152) onward is
used for various applications.
Make the initial setting on the utility package (GX Configurator-SC).
2 - 23
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Comparison between QnA/QnAS series and Q series
The table below shows the main assignment areas for the initial settings and for transmission/reception.
:Compatible,
Buffer memory address
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Buffer memory name
QnA series
AJ71QC24N
AJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4
QnAS series
Q series
A1SJ71QC24N1
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
HEX
DEC
0H
0
to
to
to
to
2EH to 38H
46 to 56
Modem Function area
(For initial setting)
Modem function specification-1 area
(For initial setting)
39H to 8FH
57 to 143
System area (use prohibited)
System area (use prohibited)
90H, 130H
144, 304
91H, 131H
145, 305
Mode switching area
Mode switching specification area
92H, 132H
146, 306
System area (use prohibited)
RS•DTR signal status spefication area
93H, 133H
147, 307
DTR/DSR, DC control
specification area
DTR/DSR, DC control
specification area
94H, 134H
148, 308
DC1/DC3 code specification area
DC1/DC3 code specification area
95H, 135H
149, 309
DC2/DC4 code specification area
DC2/DC4 code specification area
96H, 136H
150, 310
Word/byte specification area
Word/byte specification area
97H, 137H
151, 311
RS-232
CD terminal check setting area
RS-232
CD terminal check setting area
to
to
to
to
A0H, 140H
160, 320
On-demand buffer memory head address
specification area
On-demand buffer memory head address
specification area
A1H, 141H
161, 321
On-demand data length specification area
On-demand data length specification area
A2H, 142H
162, 322
Send buffer memory
head address specification area
Send buffer memory
head address specification area
A3H, 143H
163, 323
Send buffer memory length specification area
Send buffer memory length specification
area
A4H, 144H
164, 324
Receive end data count specification area
Receive end data count specification area
A5H, 145H
165, 325
Receive end code specification area
Receive end code specification area
A6H, 146H
166, 326
receive buffer memory head address specification
area
receive buffer memory head address
specification area
A7H, 147H
167, 327
receive buffer memory length specification area
receive buffer memory length
specification area
to
to
to
to
System setting area
200H to
220H
221H to
23DH
23EH
23FH to
24EH
CH1 LED OFF, communication error clear request
area
LED, communication error clear area
System information area
System information area
545 to 573
Modem function area
Modem function area
574
System information area
-
Use the default
value.
System area (use prohibited)
System area (use prohibited)
24FH
591
to
to
to
to
3FFH
1023
System area (use prohibited)
System area (use prohibited)
400H
1024
401H to
5FFH
station No. setting check area
CH1 transfer buffer memory
CH1 transfer buffer memory
Send data count specification area
Send data count specification area
1025 to
1535
Send data specification area
Send data specification area
600H
1536
Receive data count
specification area
Receive data count
specification area
601H to
1537 to
2047
Receive data storage area
Receive data storage area
7FFH
Precautions for
replacement
CH1 LED OFF, communication error
clear request area
512 to 544
575 to 590
Compatibility
-
(Continued on next page)
2 - 24
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
:Compatible,
Buffer memory address
QnA series
HEX
DEC
800H
2048
801 H to
9FFH
:Partial change required, ×:Incompatible
Buffer memory name
AJ71QC24N
AJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4
QnAS series
Q series
A1SJ71QC24N1
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
CH2 transfer buffer memory
CH2 transfer buffer memory
Send data count specification area
Send data count specification area
2049 to
2559
Send data specification area
Send data specification area
A00H
2560
Receive data count specification area
Receive data count specification
area
A01H to
2561 to
3071
Receive data storage area
Receive data storage area
BFFH
C00H to
3072 to
6911
User free area
User free area
6912 to
8182
User frame
registration area
User registration area
1FFFH
8183 to
8191
System area
(use prohibited)
System area
(use prohibited)
2000H
8192
2001H to
8193 to
32767
1AFFH
1B00H to
1FF6H
1FF7H to
7FFFH
Flash ROM write enable/disable
specification area
(Area for new function)
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
-
An additional
sequence program is
required depending
on the functions to be
used.
2 - 25
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
2.6 Reuse of Existing Programs
2.6.1 Reuse of A/AnS series programs
Data communications between programmable controller CPU and external device, and between
programmable controller CPUs that was performed by the A/AnS series computer link module can also
be performed using Q series serial communication modules.
The following shows a description of how to reuse programs for A/AnS series computer link module for
use on a Q series serial communication module at replacement of modules.
Item
Initial setting
Relevant device
Programmable
controller CPU
[Access to another station]
When accessing other station's programmable controller CPU
via MELSECNET/H, set "Valid module during other station
access" in the GX Developer network parameters.
[Data transmission by the on-demand function]
Change to a sequence program that uses the dedicated
instruction (ONDEMAND).
[Accessing the programmable controller CPU]
The available commands, accessible device range, and access
Communication
target device
Bidirectional
communication
(Bidirectional protocol
communication)
Remarks
Programmable
controller CPU
Communication using
dedicated protocol
(MC protocol
communication)
Non-procedural
communication
(Non-procedural protocol
communication)
Description
[Initial Setting on the Utility Package]
Make the initial setting on the utility package (GX ConfiguratorSC).
Refer to the Q Corresponding
[Deleting the initial setting program]
Serial Communication Module
Delete the initial setting program.
User's Manual (Basic).
[Setting the sum check code of the bidirectional protocol]
When appending messages with the sum check code in
bidirectional protocol communications, set the switches in the
GX Developer PLC parameters.
to another station are restricted.*1 *2
[Access to another station]
Another station cannot be accessed via the data link system
(MELSECNET(II), MELSECNET/B).
• Refer to the GX Developer
Operating Manual.
• Refer to the Q Corresponding
Serial Communication Module
User's Manual (Basic).
• Refer to the MELSEC
communication protocol
reference manual.
Programmable
controller CPU
[Transmission/reception of data]
Change to a sequence program that uses the dedicated
instructions (INPUT, OUTPUT).
Communication
target device
[Transmission of data]
When receiving by the receive end code on the programmable
controller CPU side, transmit the data (default, CR+LF (codes: Refer to the Q Corresponding
Serial Communication Module
0DH, 0AH)) of the end code at the end of the data to be
User's Manual (Basic).
transmitted to the programmable controller CPU.*3
Programmable
controller CPU
[Transmission/reception of data]
Change to a sequence program that uses the dedicated
instructions (BIDIN, BIDOUT).
[Printing messages on a printer]
Transmission using printer
function
Programmable
controller CPU
Programmable
controller CPU
Others
2 - 26
Programmable
controller CPU
and
Communication
target device
When messages*4 were being printed on a printer, create a
transmission program using user frames of the Q series serial
communication module.*5
Delete programs that use the regular printer function.
[Assignment of I/O signals]
There is no compatibility in the I/O signal (X/Y) assignments
between the A/AnS series and the Q series.
Check the I/O signals (X/Y) in use, and correct the program.
Refer to the Q Corresponding
Serial Communication Module
User's Manual (Application).
Refer to the Q Corresponding
Serial Communication Module
[Assignment of buffer memory]
User's Manual (Basic).
There is no compatibility in the buffer memory assignments
between the A/AnS series and the Q series.
Check the target buffer memories and addresses of the data to
read/write, and correct the program.
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
*1
Only accessing of device memory on the programmable controller CPU is available.
Accessible device range is the same as that on the A/AnS series programmable controller CPU.
The following devices cannot be accessed from external devices:
• Devices newly added on by QCPU
• Latch relays (L) and step relays (S)
*In the case of QCPU, latch relays (L) and step relays (S) are different devices from internal relays (M). Internal relays,
however, are accessed whichever of these relays is specified.
• File registers (R)
To use a function other than accessing of device memories, access using the new commands for the Q series serial
communication module.
(Create a new program.)
*2
The following devices in special relays (M9000 onwards) and special registers (D9000 onwards) are accessed:
• SD1000 to SD1255 are accessed by specifying D9000 to D9255.
• SM1000 to SM1255 are accessed by specifying M9000 to M9255.
*3
In the same way as when an A/AnS series computer link module is used, any receive end code can be registered to a Q
*4
Messages that are handled by an A/AnS series computer link module become user frames on a Q series serial
*5
Messages (user frames) can be registered on the utility package (GX Configurator-SC).
series serial communication module, and data can be transmitted to external devices as a result of this.
communication module.
Messages are transmitted by the dedicated instruction (PRR).
2 - 27
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
2.6.2 Reuse of QnA/QnAS series programs
Data communications between programmable controller CPU and external device, and between
programmable controller CPUs that was performed by the QnA/QnAS series serial communication
module can also be performed using Q series serial communication modules.
The following shows a description of how reuse programs for a QnA/QnAS series serial communication
module for use on a Q series serial communication module at replacement of module.
Item
Communication using link
instruction
Others
2 - 28
Relevant device
Description
Remarks
Programmable
controller CPU
[Data communications by link instructions]
Link instructions are not provided with a function for performing
data communications with another stations programmable
controller CPU on a multidrop connection.
The communications method must be changed (e.g.
communications via MELSECNET/H).
Delete the data communications program using the link
instruction.
Communication
target device
[Data communications on the RS-422/485 interface]
The precautions during data communications are the same as
when a QnA/QnAS series serial communication module is
Refer to the Q Corresponding
used.
Serial Communication Module
First check operation of the RS-422/485 interface on the
User's Manual (Basic).
programmable controller CPU side, and then insert a wait time,
etc. to adjust the data transmission/reception timing.
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
2.7 Other Precaution
The following shows the precautions relating to Q series serial communication modules when A/AnS/
QnA/QnAS series programmable controllers are replaced with Q series programmable controllers.
(1) About processing time
The processing time for data communications differs between the A/AnS/QnAQnAS and Q series
modules.
For this reason, some data communications timing may be also different. If necessary, adjust the timing
by inserting a wait time, for example.
For actual details on processing times, refer to the manual for the respective module.
(2) About switch settings
When using a Q series serial communication module, be sure to set the operation mode, station number
and transmission specifications in the following parameter setting screen on GX Developer.
• "Switch setting for intelligent function module" screen
The Q series serial communication module does not have setting switches for setting the mode setting,
station number setting and transmission specifications setting.
(3) About the RS-422 interface
Q series communication modules do not have the connector specifications RS-422 interface (CH1) that
is available on the QnA series communication module AJ71QC24N-R4.
Use the RS-232 interface or terminal block specifications RS-422/485 interface to connect to external
devices.
• Replacement with the RS-232
The RS-232/RS-422 converter is required outside.
• Replacement with the RS-422/485
The transmission control cannot be used.
The wiring change is required so that the transmission control at an external device side is always on.
(4) About data communications on the RS-422/485 interface
The precautions during data communications on the RS-422/485 interface are the same as when a
QnA/QnAS series serial communication module is used. When external devices may receive the wrong
data, attach a pullup/pulldown transistor on the external device side.
2 - 29
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
2.8 Program Examples
The following shows an example of how to change the nonprocedural communications program on the
A/AnS series computer link module for use on a Q series serial communication module when replacing
an A/AnS series programmable controller with a Q series programmable controller.
When applying the program examples introduced in this section to an actual program, sufficiently study
if there will be any problem in control on the target system.
(1) Program example of A/AnS series computer link module
Programmable
controller CPU
Send
enable
flag
M10
Data writing
Address
0H
Data sending
TOP
SET
X0
AJ71UC24
Buffer memory
Personal
computer
Send request
RST
Send completion
Read request
X1
FROMP
Buffer memory
Data reading
Address
80H
Y11
Read completion
(When using FROM/TO instruction)
2 - 30
Data receiving
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(a) When using application instruction (FROM/TO)
Transmission processing
Writes No. of send data.
Send
enable
flag
Module Transmis- Send
ready sion com- request
signal plete
Writes send data.
Send
data
Send
request
Send
request
Transmission complete
Transmission normal
complete flag
Send completion
check flag
Receive
data read
Turns OFF the send request
signal upon transmission
completion.
(Flag control at transmission
completion)
Transmission normal
complete flag
No.of receive
data
No.of receive
data
Reception processing
Reads No. of receive data.
Transfers the No. of receive
data to the index register.
Reads received amount of data.
Receive
data
Receive data
read complete
Reception normal
complete flag
Receive completion
check flag
Performs send request.
Turns ON the read complete
signal of the receive data.
(Flag control at reception
completion)
Reception normal
complete flag
2 - 31
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(b) When using dedicated instruction (PRN/INPUT)
Transmission processing
Send
enable
flag
Module
ready
signal
Transmis- Send
sion com- request
plete
Specifies the module's head I/O
signal.
Specifies No. of send data.
Send
data
Transmission
complete
Specifies send data.
Specifies a device by which
execution completion can be
checked.
(Instruction execution)
Transmission
complete
Send completion
check flag
Transmission normal
complete flag
(Flag control at transmission
completion)
Transmission normal
complete flag
Allowable No. of
receive data
Reception processing
Specifies allowable No. of receive
data.
Receive
data read
Specifies the module's head I/O
signal.
Allowable No. of
receive data
Receive
data
Reception
complete
Specifies allowable No. of receive
data.
Specifies a head device from
which receive data are stored.
Specifies a device by which
execution completion can be
checked.
(Instruction execution)
Receive
complete
Reception normal
complete flag
Receive completion
check flag
Reception normal
complete flag
2 - 32
(Flag control at reception
completion)
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Example of program for Q series serial communication module
Programmable
controller CPU
Send
enable
flag
QJ71C24N
Buffer memory
Data writing
M10
OUTPUT
Address
400H
Data sending
Personal
computer
Send request
Send completion
M0
Read request
Buffer memory
X3
Address
X4
Data reading
600H
INPUT
M20
Read completion
Data receiving
2 - 33
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
Interface
No.
Send
enable
flag
Transmission result
No. of send
data
Interface
No.
TransmisTransmission
sion comnormal/abnormal
plete
Transmission
normal/abnormal
Send
completion
check
flag
Send
data
Transmission complete
Transmission normal
complete flag
Transmission
failed flag
Transmission normal
complete flag
Transmission
failed flag
2 - 34
Transmission processing
Specifies channel No. for data
transmission.
Clears the device where the
transmission result is stored.
Specifies No. of send data.
(Instruction execution)
Data stored in the area starting
D11 from are sent.
(Flag control at reception
completion)
2
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
Interface
No.
CH1 read
request
Clears the device where the
reception result is stored.
Reception
result
CH1 reception
error
detection
Allowable No. of
receive data
Interface
No.
Reception Reception
complete normal/abnormal
Reception
normal/abnormal
Receive
completion
check
flag
Reception processing
Specifies channel No. for data
reception.
Reception
complete
Reception normal
complete flag
Specifies allowable No. of receive
data.
(Instruction execution)
Receive data are stored in the
area starting from D30.
(Flag control at reception
completion)
Reception
failed flag
Reception normal
complete flag
Reception
failed flag
2 - 35
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE
REPLACEMENT
3
3.1 List of Ethernet Interface Modules to be Replaced
(1) Transition from A series to Q series
Network type
10BASE-T
10BASE5
10BASE2
A series
AJ71E71N3-T
AJ71E71N-B5
AJ71E71N-B2
Alternative model
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
(2) Transition from AnS series to Q series
Network type
10BASE-T
10BASE5
10BASE2
AnS series
A1SJ71E71N3-T
A1SJ71E71N-B5
A1SJ71E71N-B2
Alternative model
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
(3) Transition from QnA series to Q series
Network type
10BASE-T
10BASE5
10BASE2
QnA series
AJ71QE71N3-T
AJ71QE71N-B5
AJ71QE71N-B2
Alternative model
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
(4) Transition from QnAS series to Q series
Network type
10BASE-T
10BASE5
10BASE2
3-1
QnAS series
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B5
A1SJ71QE71N-B2
Alternative model
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.2 Performance Specifications Comparison
3.2.1 Module performance comparison
(1) Comparison between A/AnS series and Q series
(a) 10BASE-T
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
A series
AnS series
AJ71E71N3-T
Transmission speed
A1SJ71E71N3-T
10Mbps
Communication mode
Half-duplex
Full duplex/Half-duplex
Base band
Transmission Maximum segment
specifications length
100m*1
Maximum number of
nodes/connection
Up to two modules can be
connected in a cascade
connection when using at 100
Mbps.
Cascade connection: Up to 4
Number of allowable
simultaneously open
connections
8 connections
16 connections
Fixed buffer
1k word × 8
1k word × 16
Random access buffer
3k words × 2
6k words × 1
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment special 32 points)
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment intelli
32 points)
No. of occupied I/O points
*1
QJ71E71-100
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
100Mbps/10Mbps
Transmission method
Transfer data
storage
memory
Q series
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Change the sequence program
as buffer memory assignments
differ.
(Refer to Section 3.6.2.)
Length between hub and node
(b) 10BASE5
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
A series
AnS series
Q series
AJ71E71N-B5
A1SJ71E71N-B5
QJ71E71-B5
Transmission speed
Half-duplex
Transmission method
Base band
Max. distance
between nodes
2500m
Transmission
specifications Maximum segment
length
500m
Maximum number of
nodes/connection
100/segment
Minimum node
interval
Transfer data
storage
memory
2.5m
8 connections
16 connections
Fixed buffer
1k word × 8
1k word × 16
Random access buffer
3k words × 2
6k words × 1
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment special 32 points)
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment intelli
32 points)
No. of occupied I/O points
12V DC external power supply
capacity (Transceiver)
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
10Mbps
Communication mode
Number of allowable
simultaneously open
connections
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Change the sequence program
as buffer memory assignments
differ.
(Refer to Section 3.6.2.)
Use a transceiver and AUI cables that satisfy specifications.
3-2
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(c) 10BASE2
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
A series
AnS series
Q series
AJ71E71N-B2
A1SJ71E71N-B2
QJ71E71-B2
Transmission speed
Half-duplex
Transmission method
Base band
Max. distance
between nodes
925m
Transmission
specifications Maximum segment
length
185m
Maximum number of
nodes/connection
30/segment
Minimum node
interval
Transfer data
storage
memory
3-3
0.5m
8 connections
16 connections
Fixed buffer
1k word × 8
1k word × 16
Random access buffer
3k words × 2
6k words × 1
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment special 32 points)
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment intelli
32 points)
No. of occupied I/O points
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
10Mbps
Communication mode
Number of allowable
simultaneously open
connections
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Change the sequence program
as buffer memory assignments
differ.
(Refer to Section 3.6.2.)
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Comparison between QnA/QnAS series and Q series
(a) 10BASE-T
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
QnA series
QnAS series
AJ71QE71N3-T
Transmission speed
Communication mode
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
100Mbps/10Mbps
Half-duplex
Full duplex/Half-duplex
Transmission method
100m*1
Up to two modules can be
connected in a cascade
connection when using at 100
Mbps.
Cascade connection: Up to 4
Number of allowable
Transfer data simultaneously open
connections
storage
Fixed buffer
memory
8 connections
16 connections
1k word × 8
1k word × 16
Random access buffer
*1
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
Base band
Maximum number of
nodes/connection
No. of occupied I/O points
QJ71E71-100
10Mbps
Transmission Maximum segment
specifications length
No. of E2PROM writes
Q series
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
6k words × 1
Max. 100,000 times on same area in E2PROM
-
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment special 32 points)
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment intelli
32 points)
No E2PROM (Refer to Section
3.8.)
Length between hub and node
(b) 10BASE5
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
QnA series
QnAS series
Q series
AJ71QE71N-B5
A1SJ71QE71N-B5
QJ71E71-B5
Transmission speed
Half-duplex
Transmission method
Base band
Max. distance
Transmission between nodes
specifications Maximum segment
length
2500m
500m
Maximum number of
nodes/connection
100/segment
Minimum node
interval
Random access buffer
No. of E2PROM writes
No. of occupied I/O points
12V DC external power supply
capacity (Transceiver)
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
10Mbps
Communication mode
Number of allowable
Transfer data simultaneously open
connections
storage
Fixed buffer
memory
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
2.5m
8 connections
16 connections
1k word × 8
1k word × 16
6k words × 1
Max. 100,000 times on same area in E2PROM
-
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment special 32 points)
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment intelli
32 points)
No E2PROM (Refer to Section
3.8.)
Use a transceiver and AUI cables that satisfy specifications.
3-4
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(c) 10BASE2
: compatible,
Specifications
Item
QnA series
QnAS series
Q series
AJ71QE71N-B2
A1SJ71QE71N-B2
QJ71E71-B2
Transmission speed
Half-duplex
Transmission method
Base band
Max. distance
Transmission between nodes
specifications Maximum segment
length
925m
185m
Maximum number of
nodes/connection
30/segment
Minimum node
interval
Random access buffer
No. of E2PROM writes
No. of occupied I/O points
3-5
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
10Mbps
Communication mode
Number of allowable
Transfer data simultaneously open
connections
storage
Fixed buffer
memory
: partial change required, ×: Incompatible
0.5m
8 connections
16 connections
1k word × 8
1k word × 16
6k words × 1
Max. 100,000 times on same area in E2PROM
-
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment special 32 points)
32 points/slot
(I/O assignment intelli
32 points)
No E2PROM (Refer to Section
3.8.)
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.2.2 Cable specifications comparison
The Q series can use connectable devices (e.g. hubs*1, cables, transceivers*2 *3) that are being used on
the A/AnS/QnAQnAS series.
For details on connectable devices, refer to the Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's
Manual (Basic).
*1
When connecting a hub that does not have the auto-negotiation function
On a connection with a hub that does not have the auto-negotiation function,
set the hub side to the half-duplex communication mode.
*2
About wiring of the external power supply terminal (for the transceiver) on the QJ71E71-B5
An FG terminal is not provided for the external power supply terminal on the QJ71E71-B5.
When handling the FG terminal on the external power supply (for the transceiver),
ground the FG signal on the external power supply side.
*3
The shape of the external power supply terminal (for the transceiver) differs between the QnA series QJ71QE71N-B5 and
the Q series QJ71E71-B5. When replacing the AJ71QE71N-B5 with the Q series QJ71E71-B5, refer to the following
manual for wiring.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)
3-6
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.3 Function Comparison
(1) Comparison between A/AnS series and Q series
: Compatible,
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Description
Item
A series
AnS series
Q series
AJ71E71N3-T
AJ71E71N-B5
AJ71E71N-B2
A1SJ71E71N3-T
A1SJ71E71N-B5
A1SJ71E71N-B2
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
Set in the GX Developer network
parameters.*1
(Delete the sequence program of
the section corresponding to the
function.)
(Refer to Section 3.9.)
Initial processing
The state in which data communications with an external device is possible is
set.
Open processing
The communications line for performing data communications with external
devices is connected.
Communications using fixed
buffer
(procedural, nonprocedural)
The fixed buffer on the Ethernet interface module is used to send/receive the
desired data between the programmable controller CPU and external devices.
Change to a sequence program
that uses the dedicated
instructions (BUFSND,
BUFRCV). (Refer to Section 3.9.)
Communications using random
access buffer
Data is read/written to the random access buffer of the Ethernet interface
module from multiple external devices.
Change the sequence program
as buffer memory assignments
differ. (Refer to Section 3.6.2.)
Read/write communications of
programmable controller CPU
internal data
Programmable controller CPU data is read/written to and from external devices.
Some of the commands and
device ranges are restricted.
(Refer to Section 3.7.)
Broadcast communication
Data is sent/received to all external devices on the same Ethernet network as
the Ethernet interface module by UDP/IP-based data communications.
(broadcast)
Change to a sequence program
that uses the dedicated
instructions (OPEN, CLOSE).*5
(Refer to Section 3.9.)
Set in the GX Developer network
Communications while the
Data communications can be continued when the programmable controller
programmable controller CPU is
CPU enters a stop state. (during passive open processing)
stopped
parameters.*2
(Delete the sequence program of
the section corresponding to the
function.)
Delete the sequence program of
the section corresponding to the
function, and set in the GX
Developer network parameters.
Router relay function
Data communications is performed via a router and a gateway.
*3
Set in the GX Developer network
parameters.*3
(Delete the sequence program of
the section corresponding to the
function.)
Existence check of external
device
Whether or not the external device is operating normally after the connection is
established (in open processing) is checked.
Communications using pairing
open
The connection is opened with connection for reception and
connection for transmission as a single pair. (for fixed buffer communications)
Unit of timer set values for data
communications
3-7
Set the unit (500 ms/2 s) of timer values
Fixed to 500 ms
Change to a sequence program
that uses the dedicated
instructions (OPEN).*5
Change to a sequence program
that uses the dedicated
instructions (OPEN).*4*5
Set in the GX Developer network
parameters.
(Delete the sequence program of
the section corresponding to the
function.)
The unit of timer set values is 500
ms.
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
*1
Initial Processing
The Q series performs initial processing by setting the following items in the GX Developer network parameters.
• "Network parameters Setting the number of Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET cards"
• "Operational settings"
• "Initial settings"
There is no need for a sequence program for initial processing/end processing.
*2
Communications while the programmable controller CPU is stopped
By setting "Operational settings" - "Initial timing" to "Always wait for OPEN", the Q series can perform communications while
the programmable controller CPU is stopped.
For connections for which passive open and communications during a stop are set to enabled, it is not necessary to use a
sequence program for communications during a stop/open processing/close processing.
*3
Router relay function
The Q series sets the router relay function at "Network parameters" - "router relay parameter" on GX Developer.
There is no need for a sequence program for the router relay function.
3-8
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
*4
Communications using pairing open
On the Q series, the pairing open setting of connection No.8 is not possible.
(Connection No.8 is pairing for reception, and connection No.1 is pairing for transmission.)
When the pairing open setting of connection No.8 has been made, change the sequence program.
On the Q series, the pairing open settings of connection No.1 to 7, and 9 to 15 are possible.
*5
Open processing
When "Operational settings" - "Initial timing" in GX Developer is set to "Always wait for OPEN", the sequence program using
dedicated instruction (OPEN/CLOSE) is not required.
3-9
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Comparison between QnA/QnAS series and Q series
: Compatible,
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Description
Item
Initial
processing
Sequence program
GX Developer
network parameters
QnA series
QnAS series
Q series
AJ71QE71N3-T
AJ71QE71N-B5
AJ71QE71N-B2
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B5
A1SJ71QE71N-B2
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
Precautions for
replacement
Some communications
The state in which data communications with an external device is
possible is set.
Open processing
The communications line for performing data communications with
external devices is connected.
Communications using fixed buffer
(procedural, nonprocedural)
The fixed buffer on the Ethernet interface module is used to send/
receive the desired data between the programmable controller CPU
and external devices.
Communications using random
access buffer
Data is read/written to the random access buffer of the Ethernet
interface module from multiple external devices.
Read/write communications of
programmable controller CPU
internal data
Programmable controller CPU data is read/written to and from external
devices.
Communications using data link
instructions
Use data link instructions to read/write programmable controller CPU
data of other stations via Ethernet.
File transfer
(FTP server functions)
Use FTP commands to read/write individual files from external
devices.
Broadcast communication
Data is sent/received to all external devices on the same Ethernet
network as the Ethernet interface module by UDP/IP-based data
communications. (broadcast)
Communications while the
programmable controller CPU is
stopped
Compatibility
Data communications can be continued when the programmable
controller CPU enters a stop state. (during passive open processing)
are restricted.*1
Some of the commands
and device ranges are
restricted. (Refer to
Section 3.7.)
The default log-in name
and password have been
changed from
"AJ71QE71" to
"QJ71E71", so set the
log-in name again.
Delete the sequence
program of the section
corresponding to the
function, and set in the
GX Developer network
parameters.*2
MELSECNET/H,
MELSECNET/10 relay exchange
On a network system comprising a mixture of Ethernet and
MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10, or a network system that relays
through multiple Ethernets, data communications is performed via
these multiple networks.
Router relay function
Data communications is performed via a router and a gateway.
Existence check of external device
Whether or not the external device is operating normally after the
connection is established (in open processing) is checked.
The connection is opened with connection for reception and
Communications using pairing open connection for transmission as a single pair. (For fixed buffer
communications)
Parameter registration to E2PROM
*1
Saves parameters to E2PROM.
-
Some communications
are restricted.*3
Some communications
are restricted.*4
No E2PROM
(Refer to Section 3.8.)
Initial processing using a sequence program
• All of the items (e.g. data code setting) that were set on the QnA series exchange condition setting switch operate
in an OFF state.
To change the communication conditions, add the sequence program for re-initial processing.
• As the network number and station number cannot be set, the Ethernet interface module cannot be connected
with MELSOFT products (e.g. GX Developer).
To perform the above, perform initial processing by GX Developer network parameters.
3 - 10
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
*2
Communications while the programmable controller CPU is stopped
By setting "Operational settings" - "Initial timing" to "Always wait for OPEN", the Q series can perform communications while
the programmable controller CPU is stopped.
For connections for which passive open and communications during a stop are set to enabled, it is not necessary to use a
sequence program for communications during a stop/open processing/close processing.
*3
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 relay exchange
On the Q series, Ethernet parameters (network number and station number) using the EPRSET instruction cannot be set.
When the EPRSET instruction is in use, delete the sequence program of the corresponding section, and set the Ethernet
parameters in the GX Developer network parameters.
*4
Communications using pairing open
On the Q series, the pairing open setting of connection No.8 is not possible.
(Connection No.8 is pairing for reception, and connection No.1 is pairing for transmission.)
When the pairing open setting of connection No.8 has been made, change the sequence program.
On the Q series, the pairing open settings of connection No.1 to 7, and 9 to 15 are possible.
3 - 11
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.4 Switch Setting Comparison
(1) Comparison between A/AnS series and Q series
: Compatible,
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Description
Switch name
Exchange
SW2
condition
setting
switch
SW7
SW8
*1
AnS series
Q series
A1SJ71E71N3-T
A1SJ71E71N-B5
A1SJ71E71N-B2
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
Selects the operation mode.
0: Online
1: Offline
2: Test 1
(self-loopback test)
3: Test 2 (RAM test)
4: Test 3 (ROM test)
-
Set in GX Developer
network parameters.
(1) in *1)
Selection of line
processing at a
TCP timeout
error
Selects line processing when a TCP ULP
timeout error occurs.
OFF: Closes the line
ON: Does not close the line
-
Closes the line when a
TCP ULP timeout error
occurs.
Data code
setting
Selects the communications data code type.
OFF: Binary code
ON: ASCII code
-
Set in GX Developer
network parameters.
(2) in *1)
-
Set in GX Developer
network parameters.
(3) in *1)
-
A quick start is performed
(Initial processing starts
up with no delay time.)
Operation mode setting switch
SW1
A series
AJ71E71N3-T
AJ71E71N-B5
AJ71E71N-B2
CPU
Selects write during RUN enable/disable.
communications OFF: Write during RUN disabled
timing setting
ON: Write during RUN enabled
Initial timing
Selects the initial processing startup timing.
OFF: Quick start
ON: Normal start
GX Developer network parameters
2)
3)
1)
3 - 12
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Comparison between QnA/QnAS series and Q series
: Compatible,
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Description
Switch name
Operation mode setting switch
QnA series
QnAS series
Q series
AJ71QE71N3-T
AJ71QE71N-B5
AJ71QE71N-B2
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B5
A1SJ71QE71N-B2
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
Selects the operation mode.
0: Online
1: Offline
2: Test 1 (self-loopback test)
3: Test 2 (RAM test)
4: Test 3 (ROM test)
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
-
Set in GX Developer
network parameters.
(1) in *1)
5: Test 4 (E2PROM test)
SW1
Selection of line
processing at a
TCP timeout
error
Selects line processing when a TCP ULP
timeout error occurs.
OFF: Closes the line
ON: Does not close the line
-
Closes the line when a
TCP ULP timeout error
occurs.
SW2
Data code
setting
Selects the communications data code type.
OFF: Binary code
ON: ASCII code
-
Set in GX Developer
network parameters.
(2) in *1)
Automatic
startup mode
setting
Selects the startup method when a module is
started.
OFF: Operation follows Y19
ON: Operation regardless of Y19
-
Exchange
condition
setting
SW3
switch
*1
SW7
CPU
Selects write during RUN enable/disable.
communications OFF: Write during RUN disabled
timing setting
ON: Write during RUN enabled
SW8
Initial timing
Selects the initial processing startup timing.
OFF: Quick start
ON: Normal start
Operation follows the
setting of Y19.*2
-
Set in GX Developer
network parameters.
(3) in *1)
-
A quick start is performed
(Initial processing starts
up with no delay time.)
GX Developer network parameters
2)
3)
1)
*2
When performing initial processing using GX Developer network parameters, initial processing is executed automatically.
(There is no need for a sequence program for initial processing/end processing.)
3 - 13
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.5 Parameter Comparison
(1) Comparison between A/AnS series and Q series
On the A/AnS series, the parameters of the Ethernet interface module are set in the buffer memory.
On the Q series, however, the parameters are set using GX Developer network parameters.
Therefore, there is no compatibility between the parameters of the A/AnS series and the Q series.
When replacing the A/AnS series with the Q series, delete the parameter settings of the A/AnS series
and set new parameters on GX Developer.
(2) Comparison between QnA/QnAS series and Q series
: Compatible,
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Description
Parameter name
QnA series
QnAS series
Q series
AJ71QE71N3-T
AJ71QE71N-B5
AJ71QE71N-B2
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B5
A1SJ71QE71N-B2
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
Network type
Start I/O No.
Network No.
Group No.
Station No.
-
Mode
Network parameter
IP address setting
On the QnA series, the
mode was set on the
operation mode setting
switch.
Operational setting
-
Initial settings
-
Open settings
On the QnA series, the
setting was set in the
sequence program.
Station No. <-> IP information
FTP Parameters
Router relay parameter
Routing parameters
3 - 14
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.6 Program Comparison
3.6.1 I/O signal
(1) Comparison between A/AnS series and Q series
: Compatible,
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Signal name
Input signal
AnS series
Q series
AJ71E71N3-T
AJ71E71N-B5
AJ71E71N-B2
A1SJ71E71N3-T
A1SJ71E71N-B5
A1SJ71E71N-B2
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
Xn0
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.1)
Xn1
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.1)
Xn2
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.2)
Xn3
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.2)
Xn4
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.3)
Xn5
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.3)
Xn6
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.4)
Xn7
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.4)
Xn8
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.5)
Xn9
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.5)
XnA
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.6)
XnB
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.6)
XnC
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.7)
XnD
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.7)
XnE
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.8)
XnF
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.8)
X(n+1)0
Open end (For connection No.1)
X(n+1)1
Open end (For connection No.2)
X(n+1)2
Open end (For connection No.3)
X(n+1)3
Open end (For connection No.4)
X(n+1)4
Open end (For connection No.5)
X(n+1)5
Open end (For connection No.6)
X(n+1)6
Open end (For connection No.7)
X(n+1)7
Open end (For connection No.8)
X(n+1)8
Open error detection
X(n+1)9
Initial normal end
X(n+1)A
Initial error end
X(n+1)B
Use prohibited
X(n+1)C
COM. ERR LED ON
X(n+1)D
X(n+1)E
X(n+1)F
3 - 15
A series
Use prohibited
Watchdog timer error detection
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
: Compatible,
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Signal name
Output signal
A series
AnS series
Q series
AJ71E71N3-T
AJ71E71N-B5
AJ71E71N-B2
A1SJ71E71N3-T
A1SJ71E71N-B5
A1SJ71E71N-B2
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
Yn0
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.1)
Yn1
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.2)
Yn2
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.3)
Yn3
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.4)
Yn4
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.5)
Yn5
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.6)
Yn6
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.7)
Yn7
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.8)
Yn8
Open request (For connection No.1)
Yn9
Open request (For connection No.2)
YnA
Open request (For connection No.3)
YnB
Open request (For connection No.4)
YnC
Open request (For connection No.5)
YnD
Open request (For connection No.6)
YnE
Open request (For connection No.7)
YnF
Open request (For connection No.8)
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
Y(n+1)0
Y(n+1)1
Y(n+1)2
Y(n+1)3
Use prohibited
Y(n+1)4
Y(n+1)5
Y(n+1)6
Y(n+1)7
COM. ERR LED OFF request
Y(n+1)8
Use prohibited
Y(n+1)9
Initial request
Y(n+1)A
Y(n+1)B
Y(n+1)C
Use prohibited
Buffer memory channel switching
-
Buffer memory channel
setting is not required.
Delete the sequence
program of the section
corresponding to the
function.
Y(n+1)D
Y(n+1)E
Use prohibited
Y(n+1)F
3 - 16
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Comparison between QnA/QnAS series and Q series
: compatible,
: partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Signal name
Input signal
QnAS series
Q series
AJ71QE71N3-T
AJ71QE71N-B5
AJ71QE71N-B2
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B5
A1SJ71QE71N-B2
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
Xn0
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.1)
Xn1
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.1)
Xn2
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.2)
Xn3
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.2)
Xn4
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.3)
Xn5
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.3)
Xn6
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.4)
Xn7
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.4)
Xn8
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.5)
Xn9
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.5)
XnA
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.6)
XnB
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.6)
XnC
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.7)
XnD
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.7)
XnE
Transmission normal end or reception end (For connection No.8)
XnF
Transmission error detection or reception error detection (For connection No.8)
X(n+1)0
Open end (For connection No.1)
X(n+1)1
Open end (For connection No.2)
X(n+1)2
Open end (For connection No.3)
X(n+1)3
Open end (For connection No.4)
X(n+1)4
Open end (For connection No.5)
X(n+1)5
Open end (For connection No.6)
X(n+1)6
Open end (For connection No.7)
X(n+1)7
Open end (For connection No.8)
X(n+1)8
Open error detection
X(n+1)9
Initial normal end
X(n+1)A
Initial error end
X(n+1)B
Use prohibited
X(n+1)C
COM. ERR LED ON
X(n+1)D
E2PROM read complete
X(n+1)E
E2PROM write complete
X(n+1)F
3 - 17
QnA series
Watchdog timer error detection
Use prohibited
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
No E2PROM
(Refer to Section 3.8.)
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
: compatible,
: partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Signal name
Output signal
QnA series
QnAS series
Q series
AJ71QE71N3-T
AJ71QE71N-B5
AJ71QE71N-B2
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B5
A1SJ71QE71N-B2
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
Yn0
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.1)
Yn1
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.2)
Yn2
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.3)
Yn3
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.4)
Yn4
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.5)
Yn5
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.6)
Yn6
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.7)
Yn7
Transmission request or reception end check (For connection No.8)
Yn8
Open request (For connection No.1)
Yn9
Open request (For connection No.2)
YnA
Open request (For connection No.3)
YnB
Open request (For connection No.4)
YnC
Open request (For connection No.5)
YnD
Open request (For connection No.6)
YnE
Open request (For connection No.7)
YnF
Y(n+1)0
Y(n+1)1
Compatibility
Precautions for
replacement
Open request (For connection No.8)
E2PROM read request
E
2PROM
write request
Use prohibited
No E2PROM
(Refer to Section 3.8.)
Y(n+1)2
Y(n+1)3
Y(n+1)4
Use prohibited
Y(n+1)5
Y(n+1)6
Y(n+1)7
COM. ERR LED OFF request
Y(n+1)8
Use prohibited
Y(n+1)9
Initial request
Y(n+1)A
Y(n+1)B
Y(n+1)C
Y(n+1)D
Use prohibited
Y(n+1)E
Y(n+1)F
3 - 18
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.6.2 Buffer memory
(1) Comparison between A/AnS series and Q series
There is no compatibility in the buffer memory assignments between the A/AnS series and the Q series.
Make a new sequence program.
: Compatible,
Buffer memory address
AnS series
A1SJ71E71N3-T
A1SJ71E71N-B5
A1SJ71E71N-B2
DEC
0 to 1H
0 to 1
Local station IP address
2H
2
Special function setting
Timer setting time units
3H
3
4 to 5H
4 to 5
6H
6
TCP Maximum Segment transmission setting
7H
7
Destination existence check start interval timer
value
8H
8
Destination existence check interval timer value
System area (Use prohibited)
9H
9
Destination existence check, No. of retries
AH
10
TCP ULP timeout value
TCP zero window timer value
BH
11
CH
12
TCP retransmit timer value
DH
13
TCP end timer value
EH
14
IP reassembly timer value
FH
15
10 to 17H
16 to 23
18 to 4FH
24 to 79
Exchange address settings area
(Connection No.1 to 8)
50H
80
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
Set in GX Developer network parameters.
Not used on the Q series
1EH (30) is used on the Q series.
Set in GX Developer network parameters.
Response monitoring timer value
Application setting area
(Connection No.1 to 8)
Initial error code
69H(105) is used on the Q series.
81 to 82
Local station IP address
6A to 6BH (106 to 107) is used on the Q series.
53 to 55H
83 to 85
Local station Ethernet address
56 to 58H
86 to 88
System area (Use prohibited)
59 to A8H
89 to 168
Information for each connection
(Connection No.1 to 8)
A9 to B3H
169 to 179
Error log1 to 11
B4 to 16FH
180 to 367
System area (Use prohibited)
170 to 1A3H
368 to 419
Status information by protocol type
1A4 to 1BFH
420 to 447
System area (Use prohibited)
1C0 to 1C1H
448 to 449
Subnet mask field
1C2 to 1C3H
450 to 451
Default router IP address
1C4H
452
No. of registered routers
1C5 to 1D8H
453 to 472
Setting of router 1 to 5
1D9 to 1EFH
473 to 495
System area (Use prohibited)
1F0H
496
1F1 to 1FFH
497 to 511
200 to 11FFH
512 to 4607
1200 to 1DFFH
3 - 19
A series
AJ71E71N3-T
AJ71E71N-B5
AJ71E71N-B2
HEX
51 to 52H
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Buffer memory name
4608 to 7679
6C to 6EH (108 to 110) is used on the Q series.
78 to C7H (120 to 199) is used on the Q series.
E5 to 174H (229 to 372) is used on the Q
series.
178 to 1F1H (376 to 497) is used on the Q
series.
-
Set in GX Developer network parameters.
-
Communication specification during STOP
System area (Use prohibited)
Fixed buffer No.1 to 8
Random access buffer
Not used on the Q series
680 to 267FH (1664 to 9855) is used on the Q
series.
2680 to 3E7FH (9856 to 15999) is used on the
Q series.
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Comparison between QnA/QnAS series and Q series
The buffer memory assignment of the QnA/QnAS series is compatible with that of the Q series.
The sequence program of the QnA/QnAS series can be used as is.
: Compatible,
Buffer memory address
QnA series
QnAS series
Q series
AJ71QE71N3-T
AJ71QE71N-B5
AJ71QE71N-B2
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B5
A1SJ71QE71N-B2
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
HEX
DEC
0 to 1H
0 to 1
Local station IP address
2 to 3H
2 to 3
System area (Use prohibited)
4H
4
Special function setting
5 to AH
5 to 10
System area (Use prohibited)
B to 13H
11 to 19
Monitoring timer
14H
20
Automatically open UDP port No.
15 to 1DH
21 to 29
System area (Use prohibited)
1EH
30
TCP Maximum Segment transmission setting
1FH
31
System area (Use prohibited)
20 to 27H
32 to 39
Application setting area (Connection No.1 to 8)
28 to 5FH
40 to 95
Exchange address settings area (Connection No.1 to 8)
60 to 66H
96 to 102
67H
68H
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
System area (Use prohibited)
Communication specification during
STOP
103
104
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Buffer memory name
2
E PROM parameter portion specification
System area
(Use prohibited)
69H
105
Initial error code
6A to 6BH
106 to 107
Local station IP address
6C to 6EH
108 to 110
Local station Ethernet address
6FH
111
70H
112
E2PROM register status
71H
113
Parameter use status
72H
114
E2PROM read result
73H
115
E2PROM write result
74H
116
Automatically open UDP port No.
75H
117
System area (Use prohibited)
76H
118
Network No./Station No.
77H
119
Group No.
78 to C7H
120 to 199
Information for each connection (Connection No.1 to 8)
C8H
200
Delete the sequence program.
System area
System area
(Use prohibited)
LED ON status (Left side)
LED ON status
LED ON status (Right side)
Hub connection
status area
C9H
201
CAH
202
CBH
203
CCH
204
System area (Use prohibited)
CDH
205
RECV instruction execution request
CEH
206
System area (Use prohibited)
CF to DFH
207 to 223
Data link command execution result by channel
E0 to E2H
224 to 226
System area (Use prohibited)
E3H
227
No. of errors generated
E4H
228
Error log write pointer
E5 to 174H
229 to 372
Error log block 1 to 16
175 to 177H
373 to 375
System area (Use prohibited)
Delete the sequence program.
Check the LED ON status at C8H (200).
Operation mode setting switch status
Exchange condition setting switch status
178 to 1FFH
376 to 511
200 to 201H
512 to 513
Subnet mask field
202 to 203H
514 to 515
Default router IP address
GX Developer
setting status
Status information by protocol type
Stores the setting status of the GX Developer
network parameters.
Stores the execution result of the ZNRD,
ZNWR instructions.
Some assignments differ.
For details, refer to the Q Corresponding
Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual
(Basic).
3 - 20
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
: Compatible,
Buffer memory address
HEX
DEC
QnA series
QnAS series
Q series
AJ71QE71N3-T
AJ71QE71N-B5
AJ71QE71N-B2
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B5
A1SJ71QE71N-B2
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-B5
QJ71E71-B2
204H
516
205 to 224H
517 to 548
Setting of router 1 to 8
225 to 227H
549 to 551
System area (Use prohibited)
228H
552
Number of conversion table data
553 to 936
Conversion information No.1 to 64
3A9 to 3AAH
937 to 938
Net mask pattern for MELSECNET/10 routing
3AB to 3AFH
939 to 943
System area (Use prohibited)
944 to 1663
FTP setting
680 to 267FH
1664 to 9855
Fixed buffer No.1 to 8
2680 to 3E7FH
9856 to 15999
Random access buffer
3 - 21
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
No. of registered routers
229 to 3A8H
3B0 to 67FH
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Buffer memory name
The default log-in name and password have
been changed from "AJ71QE71" to
"QJ71E71".
Set in GX Developer network parameters.
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.7 Reuse of Existing Programs
(1) A/AnS series
: Compatible,
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Compatibility
Item
Program (Communication
Sequence program
target device)
(Ethernet Interface module)
Precautions for replacement
[Programmable controller side]
The sequence program is not
compatible as buffer memory
Communications using fixed
assignments differ.
buffer
Change to a sequence
(procedural, nonprocedural)
program that uses the
dedicated instructions
(BUFSND/BUFRCV).
[Programmable controller side]
The sequence program is not
compatible as buffer memory
Communications using
assignments differ.
random access buffer
Check the buffer memory
assignments and change the
sequence program.
[Communication target device
Read/write of programmable
controller CPU internal data
-
side]
Some of the command and
device ranges are restricted.*1
*1
Read/write of programmable controller CPU internal data
(1) On the Q series, some commands (batch read/writer of microcomputer) are not usable.
For details, refer to the MELSEC communication protocol reference manual.
(2) Devices of the same name that exist on the A/AnS series programmable controller CPU can be read/written within the
device ranges of AnACPU.
The following devices cannot be accessed from external devices:
• Devices newly added on by Q/QnACPU
• Latch relays (L) and step relays (S)
• In the case of Q/QnACPU, the internal relays (M), the latch relays (L) and step relays (S) of other devices can not be
specified as target devices to be accessed.
• File registers (R)
(3) The following devices are accessed on special relays (M9000 onwards) and special registers (D9000 onwards):
• SD1000 to SD1255 are accessed by specifying D9000 to D9255.
• SM1000 to SM1255 are accessed by specifying M9000 to M9255.
3 - 22
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) QnA/QnAS series
: Compatible,
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Compatibility
Item
Program (Communication
Sequence program
target device)
(Ethernet Interface module)
Precautions for replacement
Communications using fixed
buffer
(procedural, nonprocedural)
Communications using
random access buffer
[Communication target device
Read/write of programmable
controller CPU internal data
-
side]
Some of the command and
device ranges are restricted.*1
Communications using data
link instructions
[Communication target device
side]
File transfer
(FTP server functions)
The default log-in name and
-
password have been changed
from "AJ71QE71" to
"QJ71E71", so set the log-in
name again.
*1
Read/write of programmable controller CPU internal data
(1) Commands relating to file operations on QCPU differ from commands for QnACPU.
For details, refer to the MELSEC communication protocol reference manual.
(2) The program for accessing the programmable controller CPU in the data link system cannot be used.
(The QCPU (Q mode) cannot be connected to MELSECNET (II) and MELSECNET/B.)
3 - 23
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.8 Other Precaution
(1) Parameter registration to E2PROM
As the Q series Ethernet internet module does not have an E2PROM, delete the sequence program of
the section corresponding to parameter registration to E2PROM.
On the Q series Ethernet interface module, set the GX Developer network parameters to save
parameters to the programmable controller CPU.
(2) Initial processing/end processing
Initial processing using GX Developer network parameters cannot be used jointly with initial processing/
end processing using the sequence program.
When using GX Developer network parameters, delete processing by the sequence program.
(3) Open processing/close processing
Do not use open processing/close processing using I/O signals with open/close processing using
dedicated instructions (OPEN/CLOSE) in the same connection.
(4) Passive open processing
The Q series Ethernet interface module cannot cancel open requests before an open end after passive
open processing is executed.
Perform close processing after an open end.
(5) Communications using fixed buffer
Do not use fixed buffer communication using I/O signals and fixed buffer communication using
dedicated instructions (BUFSND/BUFRCV/BUFRCVS) in the same connection.
(6) About processing time
The data communications processing time differs on the A/AnS/QnAQnAS series modules and Q series
modules.
For this reason, the data communications timing, etc. also differ. If necessary, adjust the timing by
inserting a wait time, for example.
For actual details on processing times, refer to the manual for the respective module.
(7) Replacement of the 10BASE5/10BASE2 with the 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
The A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series 10BASE5/10BASE2 module can be also replaced with the Q series
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T module. Note that a media converter is required. For details, refer to the
following TECHNICAL BULLETIN.
TECHNICAL BULLETIN No. FA-A-0075 "Production discontinuation of the AnS and QnAS series
Ethernet interface modules"
3 - 24
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.9 Program Examples
The following shows a program example at transition from the A/AnS series to the Q series.
When applying the program example introduced in this section to an actual program,
sufficiently study if there will be any problem in control on the target system.
(1) System configuration
The following shows the system configuration used in the program example in this section.
(a) A/AnS series
Ethernet interface module
A3UCPU
*1
Transmission request
signal (Y0)
External device
For connection No.1 fixed buffer transmission
(b) Q series
Ethernet interface module *1
Q25HCPU For connection No.1 fixed buffer transmission
*1
External device
BUFSND instruction
The Ethernet interface module is mounted on slot 0 of the base module.
The I/O signals of the Ethernet interface module shall be X/Y0 to X/YF.
3 - 25
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.9.1 Initial processing
The following shows a program example for performing initial processing.
(1) A/AnS series
The A/AnS series performs initial processing by writing parameters for initial processing by the
sequence program to buffer memory and turning the initial request signal (Y19) ON.
(a) Program conditions
The following shows a program example for performing initial processing when the communication
start instruction (X40) is turned ON.
Set the parameters for initial processing as follows. (Otherwise, use default values.)
Buffer memory address
Item
DEC (HEX)
0 to 1 (0 to 1H)
Set value
A20009C0H
Local station IP address
(162.0.9.192)
(b) Program example
Communication start
instruction
Initial
command
Initial
WDT
command error
detection
Local station
IP address
Initial processing program.
Write the IP address.
Local station
IP address
Initial
request
Initial
WDT
error
error
detection detection
Read the Initial error code.
Initial error
code
Clear the Initial error code.
Initial
request
Point
On the Q series, the parameter for initial processing is set using GX Developer network parameters.
When replacing the A/AnS series with the Q series, refer to Section 3.9.1 (1) to delete the program
where the parameter for initial processing is set and set the parameter using GX Developer network
parameters.
3 - 26
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Q series
The Q series performs initial processing by setting the following items in the GX Developer network
parameters.
• "Network Parameter Setting the Number of Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET Cards"
• "Operational settings"
• "Initial settings"
When replacing the A/AnS series with the Q series, delete the A/AnS series' sequence program for
initial processing.
(a) Program conditions
Set as follows in the GX Developer network parameters:
• IP address: A20009C0H (162.0.9.192)
• Other than IP address: Use default values.
(b) Network parameter setting example
1) "Network parameters Setting the number of Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET cards"
3 - 27
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
2) "Operational settings"
3) "Initial settings"
3 - 28
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.9.2 Open/close processing
The following shows a program example for performing open processing/close processing.
(1) A/AnS series
[Open processing]
The A/AnS series performs open processing by writing communication parameters
by the sequence program to buffer memory and turning the open request signal (Y8) ON.
[Close processing]
The A/AnS series performs close processing by turning the open request signal (Y8) OFF,
or by the close request (FIN) from an external device.
(a) Program conditions
The following shows a program example for performing open processing (unpassive open)
on connection No.1 when initial normal end (X19) turns ON.
Set the communication parameters as follows. (Otherwise, use default values.)
Buffer memory address
Item
DEC (HEX)
Set value
Connection No.1 application setting area
Sets the application of the fixed buffer (b0).
Destination existence check setting (b1)
16 (10H)
Pairing open setting (b7)
Communication method (protocol)
Communication protocol setting (b8)
Communications using fixed buffer procedure
performed/not performed (b9)
Open method setting (b15, b14)
24 (18H)
Host port number (For connection No.1)
0: Transmission
0: Existence check
0: No existence check
0: Pairing open
0: Not pairing open
8000H
0: TCP/IP
0: Performed
10: Unpassive open
500H
Point
The open processing and the close processing on the Q series have different methods from those on
the A/AnS series.
When replacing the A/AnS series with the Q series, refer to Section 3.9.2 (2) and change the program of
the open processing and close processing.
3 - 29
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(b) Program example
Initial
normal
complete
signal
WDT
Open
error
compledetection tion
CON-1
Send
request
-1
Open
request
-1
Open
disable
-1
The transmission, TCP, and
Unpassive setting data is
written in the connection No.1
usage availability area.
Close
command
acceptance -1
Local
station
port
No. -1
The E71 port No. is set to
500H.
Written to the connection No.1
exchange address setting
area.
Local
station
port
No. -1
Open
request
-1
Open
completion
CON-1
Open
request
-1
Open
error
detection
Open
request
-1
Communication enable-1
WDT
error
detection
Open
completion
CON-1
Connection No.1 open error
processing.
Open
error
code -1
WDT
error
detection
Open
error
code-1
Open
error
code -1
Open
error
code -1
Close
command
acceptance -1
3 - 30
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Q series
[Open processing]
The Q series uses the dedicated instruction (OPEN) to perform open processing.
The communication parameters can be set using one of the following methods:
• In the control data of the dedicated instruction (OPEN)
• On GX Developer, select "Network parameter" - "Network Parameter Setting the Number of
Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET Cards" - (Ethernet) - "Open settings".
[Close processing]
The Q series performs close processing by either using the dedicated instruction (CLOSE), or by the
close request (FIN) from an external device.
(a) Program conditions
The following shows a program example for performing open processing (unpassive open) on
connection No.1 when initial normal end (X19) turns ON with the initial normal end signal (M5000)
ON.
Set the communication parameters in "Network parameters" on GX Developer.
(b) Network parameter setting example
1) "Open settings"
Point
When replacing the A/AnS series with the Q series, change the open processing/close processing
program of the A/AnS series to that of the Q series.
3 - 31
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(c) Program example
\
Open
complete
signal
Always
ON
Connection 1
Open
complete signal
Read the open complete signal information from the connection status information
Connection 1
Open
request signal
Read the open request signal
information from the connection status information area.
\
Open
request
signal
Open instruction
1 PLS
Open
instruction
CLOSE
instruction
executed
normally
Turn off the close processing
flag.
CLOSE
instruction
executed
failed
Using GX Developer "Open settings"
Open in- Initial
struction normal
1 PLS complete
signal
Connection
1
Open
complete
signal
Connection
1
Open
request
signal
Execution
type
Execution
type
OPEN
instruction
complete
device
OPEN
OPEN
instruction instruction failed
complete device
device
OPEN
instruction
executed
normally
OPEN
instruction failed
device
OPEN
instruction
failed
Specify the execution type
of when the connection 1 is
processed.
(Performing with GX Developer "open settings")
Open processing for the
connection 1
Turn on the normal completion
flag.
Turn on the failed completion
flag.
Point
When "Operational settings" - "Initial timing" in GX Developer is set to "Always wait for OPEN",
the sequence program for open processing/close processing is not required.
3 - 32
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
3.9.3 Communication using fixed buffer
The following shows a program example for performing communication using fixed buffer.
(1) A/AnS series
[Transmission processing]
The A/AnS series performs data transmission processing to external devices from the fixed buffer by
writing the send data to the fixed buffer area by the sequence program, and turning the send request
signal (Y0) ON.
[Reception processing]
On the A/AnS series, the reception completion signal (X0) turns ON when data is received to the
fixed buffer area.
The A/AnS series performs data reception processing by reading received data from the fixed buffer
area by the sequence program, and turning the reception completion confirmation signal (Y0) ON.
(a) Program conditions
The following shows a program example for performing transmission processing by fixed buffer No.1
when the fixed buffer transmission instruction (X43) is turned ON.
(b) Program example
Open
completion
CON-1
Open
request
-1
Communication enable-1
WDT
error
detection
Send
command
acceptance-1
Fixed
BUF send
command
Send
Communi- Transmission Send
command
cation ena- normal com- error
acceptance-1 ble-1
pletion-1
detection-1
Send
request
-1
BUF CH0
switch
request-1
BUF CH0 BUF CH1 BUF CH1 BUF CH1 BUF CH1 BUF CH
switch
switchswitchswitchswitch
switchrequest-1 ing-5
ing-6
ing-7
ing-8
BUF CH0
switching-1
BUF CH0
switch
request-1
BUF CH
switch
3 - 33
BUF CH
switch
Channel switch for buffer
memory completed.
Writing to the fixed buffer
of connection 1 is possible.
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
Send
data
length
BUF CH0 Communiswitch- cation enable-1
ing-1
Send
data 1
Set the data length to 3
words.
Set the send data.
Send
data 2
Send
data 3
Writes the data length
and send data in the
fixed buffer No.1 area.
Send
data
length
Send
request
-1
BUF CH0
switching-1
Send
request
-1
Send
request
-1
Communi- Transmission
cation ena- normal comble-1
pletion-1
Send
error
detection-1
Reads error information
when a send error occurs.
Send
error
code-1
Send
request
-1
3 - 34
3
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Q series
[Transmission processing]
The Q series uses the dedicated instruction (BUFSND) to perform data transmission from the fixed
buffer to an external device.
[Reception processing]
On the Q series, the fixed buffer reception status signal (corresponding bit of address 5005H) in
buffer memory turns ON when data is received to the fixed buffer area.
The Q series uses the dedicated instruction (BUFRCV) to perform data reception.
(a) Program condition
The following shows a program example for performing transmission processing by fixed buffer No.1
when the transmission instruction (M7000) is turned ON.
(b) Program example
Send
Initial
instruction normal
complete
signal
Send
instruction
1PLS
Connection
1
open complete
signal
Data length
setting (No. of
words)
Send
instruction
1PLS
Send
data
setting
Specify the setting data for
transmission processing
Word length to send the
data
Send data
Send
data
setting
Send
data
setting
Data length
setting (No. of
words)
BUFSND BUFSND
instruction instruction failed
complete device
device
BUFSND
instruction failed
device
3 - 35
BUFSND
instruction
complete
device
Transmission processing
by the connection 1.
Processing for
normal completion
Turn on the normal
completion flag.
Processing for
error completion
Turn on the failed
completion flag.
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION
MODULE REPLACEMENT
4
4.1 List of Intelligent Communication Modules to be Replaced
(1) Replacement of intelligent communication modules AD51H-S3/A1SD51S
A/AnS series module
AD51H-S3
Alternative model
QD51
Remarks
RS-232: 2ch, RS-422/485: none
A1SD51S
QD51-R24
RS-232: 1ch, RS-422/485: 1ch
Point
(1)
(2)
The serial communication module (QJ71C24N(-R2/R4)) can be used, depending on applications.
For details, refer to the TECHNICAL BULLETIN (FA-A-0059).
Using the QA6B as an extension base unit allows the AD51H-S3 to be used in the Q series
system.
Using the QA1S6B allows the A1SD51S to be used in the Q series system.
Remarks
For how to replace the A1SD51S with the QD51(-R24), refer to Appendix 2.
(2) Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51-S3
A series module
AD51-S3
Alternative model
QD51
QD51-R24
Remarks
RS-232: 2ch, RS-422/485: none
RS-232: 1ch, RS-422/485: 1ch
Point
(1)
(2)
The serial communication module (QJ71C24N(-R2/R4)) can be used depending on the use
application.
The AD51-S3 can be used in the Q series system by using the QA6B as extension base unit.
4-1
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.2 Performance Specifications Comparison
4.2.1 Module performance comparison
(1) Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51H-S3
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
Programming language
Program
Internal
memory
8
2
384K bytes
(16/32/48/64K bytes selectable for
one task.)
Max. 64K bytes
(16/32/48/64K bytes selectable for
one task.)
8K bytes
Buffer
memory
6K bytes
Extension
relay (EM)
1024 points
Extension
register (ED)
1024 points
Input: 27 points
Input: 26 points
Output: 26 points
Output: 23 points
(9 points: For task start from the PLC (2 points: For task start from the PLC
CPU.)
CPU.)
Yes
(Memory card write protectable)
Memory protection
×
Review the BASIC program, and
reduce the number of tasks to
two or less.
×
Review the BASIC program, and
reduce the memory size to 64K
bytes or less.
×
Change I/O signals with a
program.
Yes
(Flash ROM write protectable)
RS-232
2 channels
QD51: 2 channels
QD51-R24: 1 channel
The cable connector must be
changed.
RS-422/485
1 channel
QD51: QD51-R24: 1 channel
Use the QD51-R24.
Parallel
1 channel
Interface
Memory card
2 slots
Clock function
Multitask debugging
I/O points occupied
No. of slots
×
Consider changing the external
devices to RS-232/RS-422
interface devices.
-
×
Use CPU module devices.
None
Possible
(64kWROM, 128kWROM,
256kWROM)
User program in ROM
Console
-
None
Power failure protection
4-2
Precautions for replacement
• Start at power on
• Start by interrupt from the programmable controller CPU (This cannot be
performed when Compiler BASIC is used.)
• Start by start request from another task
Common
memory
General input/output
Compatibility
AD51H-BASIC
Number of tasks
Task start conditions
QD51
QD51-R24
AD51H-S3
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
•
•
•
•
•
•
A7PHP
A7HGP
A7LMS
VG-620
VT-382
IBM-PC/AT-compatible
personal computer
Possible
(Stored in the built-in Flash ROM)
Use an IBM-PC/AT-compatible
personal computer.
The AD51H-BASIC software
package can be used with the
QD51(-R24). (This package can
be also used with the A series.)
• IBM-PC/AT-compatible
personal computer
Possible (when a debugger is used.)
48 points
(The first 16 points are open and the
last 32 points are special.)
32 points
×
2 slots
1 slot
×
Change the start I/O No. in the
PLC parameter I/O assignment
setting.
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Replacement of intelligent communication module A1SD51S
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
QD51
QD51-R24
A1SD51S
Programming language
Internal
memory
Precautions for replacement
×
Review the BASIC program, and
reduce the memory size to 64K
bytes or less.
×
Change I/O signals with a
program.
2
• Start at power on
• Start by interrupt from the programmable controller CPU (This cannot be
performed when Compiler BASIC is used.)
• Start by start request from another task
Program
Max. 64K bytes
(16/32/48/64K bytes selectable for one task.)
Common
memory
8K bytes
Buffer
memory
6K bytes
Extension
relay (EM)
1024 points
Extension
register (ED)
1024 points
General input/output
Compatibility
AD51H-BASIC (interpreter, compile)
Number of tasks
Task start conditions
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Input: 27 points
Input: 26 points
Output: 26 points
Output: 23 points
(9 points: For task start from the PLC (2 points: For task start from the PLC
CPU.)
CPU.)
Yes
Memory protection
Yes
(Flash ROM write protectable)
(E2PROM write protectable)
RS-232
2 channels
QD51: 2 channels
QD51-R24: 1 channel
The cable connector must be
changed.
RS-422/485
1 channel
QD51: QD51-R24: 1 channel
Use the QD51-R24.
Interface
Clock function
Power failure protection
None
Yes
(common memory, extension relay,
extension register)
None
Possible
(Stored in the built-in EEP-ROM)
Possible
(Stored in the built-in flash ROM)
User program in ROM
Console
Multitask debugging
I/O points occupied
No. of slots
•
•
•
•
•
•
Refer to Section 4.6.2 (4).
Use an IBM-PC/AT-compatible
personal computer.
A7PHP
A7HGP
A7LMS
VG-620
VT-382
IBM-PC/AT-compatible personal
computer
• IBM-PC/AT-compatible personal
computer
The AD51H-BASIC software
package can be used with the
QD51(-R24). (This package can
be also used with the A series.)
Possible (when a debugger is used.)
32 points
(I/O assignment: special 32 points)
32 points
(I/O assignment: intelli 32 points)
1 slot
4-3
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(3) Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51-S3
The BASIC program of AD51-S3 is incompatible with that of QD51/QD51-R24. Analyze the existing
program to create a program with AD51H-BASIC.
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
Precautions for replacement
QD51
QD51-R24
GPC-BASIC
AD51H-BASIC
×
Change the BASIC program to
AD51H-BASIC.
Max. 8
2
×
Review the BASIC program, and
reduce the number of tasks to
two or less.
• Start at power on
• Start by interrupt from the
programmable controller CPU
(Impossible when compiled BASIC
is run.)
• Start by a real time interrupt
• Start at power on
• Start by interrupt from the
programmable controller CPU
(This cannot be performed when
Compiler BASIC is used.)
• Start by start request from another
task
Program
Max. 64K bytes + 48K bytes (when
using ROM)
Max. 64K bytes
(16/32/48/64K bytes selectable for
one task.)
Common
memory
2K bytes
8K bytes
Number of tasks
Task start conditions
Buffer
memory
When the task is started using a
real time interrupt, the condition
must be changed.
×
-
1024 points
-
Extension
register (ED)
-
1024 points
-
Input: 13 points
Output: 10 points
Input: 26 points
Output: 23 points
×
RS-232
2 channels
(Channels 3 and 4)
RS-422
2 channels
(Channel 1: connector
Channel 2: terminal block)
RS-422/485
2 channels
(Channels 3 and 4)
Power failure protection
User program in ROM
Review the BASIC program, and
reduce the memory size to 64K
bytes or less.
6K bytes
Extension
relay (EM)
General input/output
Interface
Compatibility
AD51-S3
Programming language
Internal
memory
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
QD51: 2 channels
(Channels 1 and 2)
QD51-R24: 1 channel
(Channel 1)
Change I/O signals with a
program.
The cable connector must be
changed.
Use the QD51-R24.
QD51: QD51-R24: 1 channel
(Channel 2)
Yes
None
Possible
(8K ROM/16K ROM)
Possible
(Stored in the built-in flash ROM)
×
Use an IBM-PC/AT-compatible
personal computer.
Console
• A6GPP
• A6PHP
• VG-620/670
• • • Manufactured by Victor
Data Systems
I/O points occupied
No. of slots
4-4
The software package for
starting up the system, which
was used on the AD51-S3,
cannot be used. Use the
AD51H-BASIC software
package supporting the QD51 (R24).
• IBM-PC/AT-compatible
personal computer
48 points
(The first 16 points are open and the
last 32 points are special.)
32 points
×
2 slots
1 slot
×
Change the start I/O No. in the
PLC parameter I/O assignment
setting.
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.2.2 Cable specifications comparison
(1) Replacement of intelligent communication modules AD51H-S3/A1SD51S
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
AD51H-S3
Cable
RS-232
Max. 15m
D-Sub 25P
(male, screw type)
D-Sub 9P*2
(male, screw type)
D-Sub 9P*2
(male, screw type)
Item
Description
Cable type
Shielded cable
Number of pairs
3
Conductor resistance (20 )
88.0 /km or less
Insulation resistance
10000 M -km or more
Cable
RS-422/485
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
Use a cable that is compliant with the RS-232 standard.*1
Cable length
Applicable
connector for
external wiring
(module side of
connection cable)
QD51
QD51-R24
A1SD51S
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Dielectric withstand voltage
500 VDC for 1 minute
Electrostatic capacitance (1kHz)
Average 60nF/km or less
Characteristic impedance
(100kHz)
110 10
Change the connector.
*1
Cable length
External wiring
(module side of
connection cable)
Max. 500m
Max. 1200m
D-Sub 25P
(male, screw type)
Terminal block
Change the connector.
*1
Recommended RS-232 and RS-422/485 cables are listed in the Q series intelligent communication module manual.
*2
Use an exclusive connector shell listed in the Q series intelligent communication module manual for the cable to be
connected to a Q series intelligent communication module.
4-5
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51-S3
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
Cable
RS-422
Max. 15m
Applicable
connector for
external wiring
(module side of
connection cable)
Cable
D-Sub 25P
(male, screw type)
D-Sub 9P*2
(male, screw type)
Same as the RS-422/485
-
D-Sub 25P
(male, screw type)
Connection to the RS-232 or RS422/485 interface
Applicable
connector for
external wiring
(module side of
connection cable)
Item
Description
Cable type
Shielded cable
Number of pairs
3
Conductor resistance (20 )
88.0 /km or less
Cable
RS-422/485
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
Use a cable that is compliant with the RS-232 standard.*1
Cable length
RS-232
QD51
QD51-R24
AD51-S3
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Insulation resistance
10000 M -km or more
Dielectric withstand voltage
500 VDC for 1 minute
Electrostatic capacitance (1kHz)
Average 60nF/km or less
Characteristic impedance
(100kHz)
110 10
Change the connector.
The Q series does not have the
RS-422 interface. The interface
used must be changed.
*1
Cable length
External wiring
(module side of
connection cable)
500m
Connection to the terminal block
For the connection method,
refer to the manual for the
module used.
*1
Recommended RS-232 and RS-422/485 cables are listed in the Q series intelligent communication module manual.
*2
Use an exclusive connector shell listed in the Q series intelligent communication module manual for the cable to be
connected to a Q series intelligent communication module.
4-6
Max. 1200m
(overall cable distance)
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.3 Function Comparison
(1) Replacement of intelligent communication modules AD51H-S3/A1SD51S
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
AD51H-S3
A1SD51S
QD51
QD51-R24
Sub-CPU
Function
Complex numerical and functional calculations which would
lengthen the programmable controller CPU's scan time can be
done by a BASIC program.
• Collection, analysis and correction of measurement data
• Function calculations such as Sin, Log and square roots, etc.
Monitor Display
Function
This displays the operating status (production conditions, running
status, breakdown etc.) on a console or terminal connected to the
module.
Key Input
Function
This allows input of production schedules, production quantity,
operations, setting data, etc. from the keyboard of a console or
terminal connected to the module.
Functions by
Printer Function
BASIC programs
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
This prints out production plans, results, daily reports, breakdown,
planning data, inspection results, test results charts, etc. with a
printer connected to the module.
Data Input
Function
This enables input of data from a bar code reader, a magnetic card
reader, etc. that is connected to the module. (Since transmission is
available in a free format through a BASIC program, it will suit any
protocol of the opposite device.)
• Input of production lot No., product name, quantity, etc.
• Collection of measured values, test data
External Device
Connection
Function
This allows connection to a computer to the RS-232C or RS-422/
485 interface and sends and receives data through a BASIC
program.
Clock Function
This writes and reads clock data (year, month, day, hour, minute,
second, day of week) of a programmable controller CPU with the
clock function.
Online Programming Function
This creates, executes and corrects BASIC programs through
system commands by connecting a console to the module.
It also writes and reads execution programs to a Flash ROM by
system commands.
Multitask Debugging Function
This multitask function allows debugging while running BASIC
programs by connecting a console and a debugger to the module.
4-7
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51-S3
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
QD51
QD51-R24
Sub-CPU
Function
Complex numerical and functional calculations which would
lengthen the programmable controller CPU's scan time can be
done by a BASIC program.
• Collection, analysis and correction of measurement data
• Function calculations such as Sin, Log and square roots, etc.
Monitor Display
Function
This displays the operating status (production conditions, running
status, breakdown, etc.) on a console or terminal connected to the
module.
Key Input
Function
This allows input of production schedules, production quantity,
operations, setting data, etc. from the keyboard of a console or
terminal connected to the module.
Functions by
Printer Function
BASIC programs
Data Input
Function
External Device
Connection
Function
This allows connection to a computer to the RS-232C or RS-422/
485 interface and sends and receives data through a BASIC
program.
Clock Function
This writes and reads clock data (year, month, day, hour, minute,
second, day of week)of a programmable controller CPU with the
clock function.
Multitask Debugging Function
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
This prints out production plans, results, daily reports, breakdown,
planning data, inspection results, test results charts, etc. with a
printer connected to the module.
This enables input of data from a bar code reader, a magnetic card
reader, etc. that is connected to the module. (Since transmission is
available in a free format through a BASIC program, it will suit any
protocol of the opposite device.)
• Input of production lot No., product name, quantity, etc.
• Collection of measured values, test data
Online Programming Function
4-8
AD51-S3
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
The BASIC program of the
AD51-S3 is incompatible with
that of the QD51/QD51-R24.
Analyze the existing program
to create a program with
AD51H-BASIC.
This creates, executes and corrects BASIC programs through
system commands by connecting a console to the module.
It also writes and reads execution programs to a Flash ROM by
system commands.
-
This multitask function allows
debugging while running BASIC
programs by connecting a
console and a debugger to the
module.
-
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.4 Switch Setting
(1) Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51H-S3
: Compatible,
Specifications
Switch name
to
SW5
Mode
setting
switch 2
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
0 or 1: Execution mode
2 or 3: Multitask debugging mode
4: Programming
5 to F: Unusable
Mode setting switch 1
SW1
QD51
QD51-R24
AD51H-S3
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Console or debug port
setting
Set by the combination of devices to be
used as a console and a debugger.
*1
Set the switches in the GX
Developer’s PLC parameter
settings.
-
SW6
BASIC program
operation stop by
[BREAK]/[Ctrl] + [C]
keys.
OFF: Disabled
ON: Enabled
SW7
Boot target of
execution program
OFF: Memory card priority
ON: EP-ROM priority
-
-
Execution programs are stored
in a flash ROM.
SW8
Scheduled time of task
OFF: 50ms
ON: 100ms
-
-
The scheduled time of task
must be fixed to 50ms.
SW1
Operation of the
AD51H when resetting OFF: Reset signal invalid
a programmable
ON: Reset signal valid
controller CPU
-
-
The reset signal of
programmable controller CPU
is valid.
SW2
SW3
Switch 2
Time accessible by
FROM/TO instructions
from a programmable
controller CPU when
resetting the AD51H
SW3
Accessible time
OFF
OFF
200 ms
OFF
ON
500 ms
ON
OFF
1000 ms
ON
ON
2000 ms
Set the switches in the GX
Developer’s PLC parameter
settings.
(Select 200ms or 2000ms.)
-
SW4
-
Fixed to OFF
-
-
SW5
-
Fixed to OFF
-
-
SW6
EP-ROM type to be
used
OFF: 64kROM/128kROM
ON: 256kROM
-
Terminal resistor
setting
SW7 and SW8 are both OFF: Without
terminal resistor
SW7 and SW8 are both ON: With terminal
resistor
-
Connect the included terminal
resistor.
-
The write protect setting of a
flash ROM is available.
Set the switches in the GX
Developer’s PLC parameter
settings.
SW7
SW8
SW1
No EP-ROM
Memory-protect range
0 to 0FFFFh
SW2
Memory- SW3
protect
SW4
range
SW5
switch
SW6
10000 to 1FFFFh
SW7
60000 to 6FFFFh
SW8
70000 to 7FFFFh
*1
SW2
20000 to 2FFFFh
30000 to 3FFFFh
40000 to 4FFFFh
50000 to 5FFFFh
OFF: Not protected
ON: Protected
The next page shows the settings of mode setting switch 2 that vary by the combination of devices to be used as consoles
and debuggers.
4-9
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
Debugger
RS-422 (CH3)
Mode Setting
Switch
Console
A7PHP
A7HGP
A7LMS
IBM-PC/ATcompatible series
(Connected to
CH3)
None
A7PHP/
A7HGP/
A7LMS/
IBM-PC/ATcompatible
1
2
3
4
5
-
ON
VT-382
IBM-PC/ATcompatible series
(Connected to
CH1)
Mode setting
switch 2
1
2
3
4
5
SW1
to
SW5
ON
Set each
switch to
the side.
VG-620
(Connected to
CH1)
None
4 - 10
RS-232C (CH1)
VT-382/
IBM-PC/ATcompatible
RS-232C (CH2)
VG-620
VT-382/
IBM-PC/ATcompatible
VG-620
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
-
1
2
3
4
5
-
ON
-
-
-
1
2
3
4
5
ON
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Replacement of intelligent communication module A1SD51S
: Compatible,
Specifications
Switch name
to
SW5
Mode
setting
switch 2
Console or debug port
setting
Set by the combination of devices to be
used as a console and a debugger.
*1
-
Set the switches in the GX
Developer’s PLC parameter
settings.
There is no setting of valid or
invalid.
The reset signal of the
programmable controller CPU
is valid.
SW6
BASIC program
operation stop by
[BREAK]/[Ctrl] + [C]
keys.
OFF: Disabled
ON: Enabled
SW7
Operation of the
A1SD51S when the
programmable
controller CPU is reset
Set the reset signal from the
programmable controller CPU to valid or
invalid.
OFF: Reset signal invalid
ON: Reset signal valid
-
SW8
The time for how long
the programmable
controller CPU can
access to the
A1SD51S using the
FROM/TO instructions
after the A1SD51S is
reset
OFF: 200ms
ON: 2000ms
-
Set the switches in the GX
Developer’s PLC parameter
settings.
(Select 200ms or 2000ms.)
-
Common memory is not backed
up by a battery. To save data,
use the file register or latch
device of the programmable
controller CPU.
SW9
SW10
SW11
SW12
*1
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
0 or 1: Execution mode
2 or 3: Multitask debugging mode
4: Programming
5 to F: Unusable
Mode setting switch 1
SW1
QD51
QD51-R24
A1SD51S
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Backup area clear
setting
OFF: Clear disabled
ON: Clear enabled
E2PROM
OFF: Write protection OFF
ON: Write protection ON
write protect
setting
(Not used)
-
×
Write protect can be set for a
flash ROM.
Set the switches in the GX
Developer’s PLC parameter
settings.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
The next page shows the settings of mode setting switch 2 that vary by the combination of devices to be used as consoles
and debuggers.
4 - 11
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
Debugger
RS-422 (CH3)
Mode Setting
Switch
Console
A7PHP/
A7HGP/
A7LMS/
IBM-PC/ATcompatible
None
A7PHP
A7HGP
A7LMS
IBM-PC/ATcompatible series
(Connected to
CH3)
RS-232C (CH1)
VT-382/
IBM-PC/ATcompatible
VT-382/
IBM-PC/ATcompatible
VG-620
VG-620
-
ON
ON
VT-382
IBM-PC/ATcompatible series
(Connected to
CH1)
Mode setting
switch 2
RS-232C (CH2)
-
ON
ON
ON
-
-
SW1
CHI
to
SW5
(RS-
n
ON
ON
ON
GPP/H
ON
Set each
VG-620
switch to
(Connected to
the side.Gene CH1)
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
-
ON
None
4 - 12
ON
ON
ON
ON
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(3) Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51-S3
: Compatible,
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Specifications
Switch name
QD51
QD51-R24
AD51-S3
Compatibility
SW1
The write protect
setting of a flash
ROM is available.
Set the switches in
the GX Developer’s
PLC parameter
settings.
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
48K bytes of the RAM area may be used for memory protect setting in
Memory
units of 8K bytes.
protect range
The system data area may also be used for the setting.*1
Precautions for
replacement
-
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
SW10
SW11
-
Fixed to OFF
-
-
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
Terminal
resistor
SW14 and SW15 are both OFF: Without terminal resistor
SW14 and SW15 are both ON: With terminal resistor
SW16
Position
DIP
switch
SW16
Console
channel
ON
OFF
SW17
Position
CHI
(RS-422)
CH3
(RS-232C)
GPP/HGP/PHP
General port
General port
Connect the
included terminal
resistor.
-
Set the switches in
the GX Developer’s
PLC parameter
settings.
VG-670/A6GPP
8000H to 8004H
Data
Specific pattern
-
Description
System data is transferred from
channel 1 addresses 8000H to
80FFH to system data area,4F00H
to 4FFFH.
ON
SW17
Unspecific pattern
System data
transfer
Not transferred.
Specific pattern
Not transferred.
Unspecific pattern
Not transferred.
-
-
-
-
For AD51H-BASIC,
the system data is
not needed.
OFF
SW18
-
Fixed to OFF
4 - 13
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
*1
Memory protect area
The shaded areas
in the memory maps below can be memory-protected.
0000H
Common area
1) 4F00H to 4FFFH (system data area)
6000H to 67FFH (user work area)
7FFFH
User memory area
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
2)
5)
2)
5)
3)
6)
3)
6)
4)
7)
4)
7)
A)
B)
8000H
8K bytes
FFFFH
RAM area when ROM is installed.
Remarks
(1)
(2)
4 - 14
The memory protect DIP switch number is shown as 1) to 7) in the above memory map.
The memory protect DIP switch numbers for a given RAM address range remain unchanged when
ROM is loaded although the channel number has changed from channel 1 to 2 or from 3 to 4.
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.5 Program Comparison
4.5.1 I/O signal
(1) Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51H-S3
: Compatible,
Input
signal
AD51H-S3
QD51
QD51-R24
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
General input
X5
X6
X7
X8
Use prohibited
X9
XA
XB
Multitask execution start
XC
Multitask stop
XD
QD51 (-R24) system down
XE
QD51 (-R24) operating status
XF
Use prohibited
X10
Change "X10 to X1D" to "X0 to XD",
and "X20 to X2F" to "X10 to X1D".
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
General input
X16
General input
X17
X18
X19
X1A
X1B
Multitask execution start
X1C
Multitask stop
X1D
AD51H system down
X1E
X1F
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
X20
to
General input
Outside I/O point range
X2F
4 - 15
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
: Compatible,
Output
signal
AD51H-S3
QD51
QD51-R24
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
Unused
(Can be used for internal relay (M).)
General output
Y9
YA
YB
YC
YD
YE
YF
Y10
Y11
General output/Start BASIC
task No.1 designation
Y12
General output/Start BASIC
task No.2 designation
Y13
Change "Y10 to Y20" to "Y0 to Y10"
and "Y13 to Y18".
Y14
Y15
General output
Y16
Y17
General output
Y18
Y19
Task start signal
Y1A
Reset request signal
Y1B
Y1C
Use prohibited
Y1D
Y1E
Y1F
Y20
Y21
Y22
Y23
Y24
Y25
General output/Start BASIC task No.
designation
Outside I/O point range
Y26
Y27
Y28
Y29
Program start signal
Y2A
to
Y2F
4 - 16
Use prohibited
In addition, change "Y21 to Y28" to
"Y11 to Y12" with the task divided
into two.
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Replacement of intelligent communication module A1SD51S
: Compatible,
Input
signal
A1SD51S
QD51
QD51-R24
General input
General input
Multitask execution start
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
XA
XB
Multitask execution start
XC
Multitask stop
Multitask stop
XD
A1SD51S system down
QD51 (-R24) system down
XE
XF
Use prohibited
QD51 (-R24) operating status
Use prohibited
-
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
X16
X17
X18
General input
General input
X19
X1A
X1B
X1C
X1D
X1E
X1F
Use prohibited
×
4 - 17
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
: Compatible,
Output
signal
A1SD51S
QD51
QD51-R24
General output
General output
Y11
General output/Start BASIC
task No.1 designation
General output/Start BASIC
task No.1 designation
Y12
General output/Start BASIC
task No.2 designation
General output/Start BASIC
task No.2 designation
General output
General output
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y9
YA
YB
YC
YD
YE
YF
Y10
-
Y13
Y14
Y15
Y16
Y17
Y18
Y19
Task start signal
Task start signal
Y1A
Reset request signal
Reset request signal
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
Y1B
Y1C
Y1D
Y1E
Y1F
4 - 18
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(3) Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51-S3
: Compatible,
Input
signal
AD51H-S3
QD51
QD51-R24
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
General input
X6
X7
X8
Use prohibited
X9
XA
XB
Multitask execution start
XC
Multitask stop
XD
QD51 (-R24) system down
XE
QD51 (-R24) operating status
XF
Use prohibited
Change "X10 to X1C" to "X0 to XA",
and "X10 to X1F".
X10
X11
X12
Also, change X1D to XD.
X13
X14
X15
X16
General input
General input
X17
X18
X19
X1A
X1B
X1C
X1D
AD51-S3 system down
X1E
X1F
X20
to
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
Outside I/O point range
X2F
4 - 19
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
: Compatible,
Output
signal
AD51-S3
QD51
QD51-R24
: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Compatibility
Precautions for replacement
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
General output
Y8
Y9
YA
YB
YC
YD
YE
YF
Y10
Unused
(Can be used for internal relay (M).)
Y11
General output/Start BASIC
task No.1 designation
Y12
General output/Start BASIC
task No.2 designation
Y13
Y14
Y15
General output
Y16
Y17
Y18
Y19
Task start signal
Y1A
Reset request signal
Y1B
Y1C
Use prohibited
Y1D
Y1E
Y1F
Y20
Y21
Y22
Y23
Y24
General output
Y25
Y26
Outside I/O point range
Y27
Y28
Y29
Turning this ON by sequence program
interrupts the AD51 operation.
Y2A
to
Y2F
4 - 20
Use prohibited
Change "Y20 to Y29" to "Y0 to Y1F".
However, when Y29 is used as an
interrupt signal, the program must be
reviewed.
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.5.2 Buffer memory
(1) Replacement of intelligent communication modules AD51H-S3/A1SD51S
There is no difference between the QD51(-R24) and the AD51H-S3/A1SD51S.
(2) Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51-S3
For the buffer memory areas which data are read/written from/to a CPU module, no difference is
identified between the QD51(-R24) and the AD51-S3. However, the memory configuration and memory
map in the module differ.
4 - 21
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.6 Reuse of Existing Programs
4.6.1 Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51H-S3
(1) Usable channels
Usable channels are as shown below.
: Usable, ×: Unusable.
Item
AD51H-S3
QD51
QD51-R24
CH. 1 (RS-232)
Channel
CH. 2 (RS-232)
×
CH. 3 (RS-422/RS-485)
×
CH. 4 (Parallel)
×
×
(a) Use in the QD51
Since the QD51 does not have CH. 3 (RS-422/485) and CH. 4 (Parallel) interfaces, using existing
programs is not allowed.
Modify the BASIC program for CH. 3 (RS-422/485) to the other channels or use the QD51-R24.
CH. 4 (Parallel) is not provided.
(b) Use in the QD51-R24
Since the QD51-R24 does not have CH. 2 (RS-232) and CH. 4 (Parallel) interfaces is not allowed.
Modify the BASIC program for CH. 2 (RS-232) to the other channels or use the QD51.
CH. 4 (Parallel) is not provided.
(2) Communications specifications
Data bit and stop bit settings differ between the models. Correct the BASIC program.
Item
AD51H-S3
QD51(-R24)
Data bit
5, 6, 7, 8
7, 8
Stop bit
1, 1.5, 2
1, 2
(3) Common memory backup
Common memory backup is as shown below.
Item
Common memory
AD51H-S3
QD51(-R24)
Backed up
Not backed up
In the QD51 (-R24), common memory is not backed up by a battery. If backup is necessary, use the
programmable controller CPU's file register (R).
Modify the program that accesses the common memory using GETMEM and PUTMEM instructions to
access the file register (R) using PCRD and PCWT instructions.
(4) Maximum number of tasks
The maximum number of tasks that can be run at the same time is as shown below.
Item
Max. number of tasks
AD51H-S3
QD51(-R24)
8
2
In the QD51 (-R24), a maximum of only 2 BASIC programs can be run at a time.
4 - 22
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(5) PCRD/PCWT command
The processing codes shown below are not executable for the Q/QnA CPUs. Replace any codes which
can be replaced.
(a) PCRD commands
Processing codes used in the AD51H-S3
Processing Code
Contents
Processing codes used in the QD51(-R24)
Processing Code
Contents
Monitoring of the devices registered by the PCWT
command
2(&H2)
4(&H4)
Reading of extension file register data
5(&H5)
Monitoring the extension file register registered by the
PCWT command
7(&H7)
Reading of continuous address designation data in the
extension file register
8(&H8)
Reading of sequence programs
9(&H9)
Reading of microcomputer programs
10(&HA)
Reading of comment data
515 (&H203)
Reading of Q/QnA series device memory
-
Cannot be replaced with Q/QnA series.
11(&HB)
Reading of extension comment data
12(&HC)
Reading of the buffer memories of a special function
module
533 (&H215)
Reading of the buffer memories of a Q/QnA series
intelligent function module
13(&HD)
Reading of the model name of a programmable controller
CPU
513 (&H201)
Reading of the model name of a Q/QnA programmable
controller CPU
14(&HE)
Reading of parameter data (Reading of MELSECNET/10
parameters)
21(&H15)
Reading of network information
22(&H16)
Reading of routing parameters
-
Cannot be replaced with Q/QnA series.
(b) PCWT command
Processing codes used in the AD51H-S3
Processing Code
2(&H2)
Contents
Processing codes used in the QD51(-R24)
Processing Code
Contents
Device memory monitor registration
3(&H3)
Random writing to device memory
4(&H4)
Writing to extension file register
5(&H5)
Expansion file register monitor registration
6(&H6)
Random writing to extension file register
7(&H7)
Continuous address designation data writing to extension
file register
8(&H8)
Writing of sequence programs
9(&H9)
Writing of microcomputer programs
10(&HA)
Writing of comment data
11(&HB)
Writing of extension comment data
12(&HC)
Writing of the buffer memories of a special function
module
14(&HE)
Writing of parameter data (Writing of MELSECNET/10
parameters)
15(&HF)
Analysis of parameter data
515 (&H203)
Writing of Q/QnA series device memory
-
Cannot be replaced with Q/QnA series.
533 (&H215)
-
Writing to the buffer memories of a Q/QnA series
intelligent function module
Cannot be replaced with Q/QnA series.
4 - 23
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.6.2 Replacement of intelligent communication module A1SD51S
(1) Usable channels
Usable channels are as shown below.
: Usable, ×: Unusable.
Item
A1SD51S
QD51
QD51-R24
CH. 1 (RS-232)
CH. 2 (RS-232)
×
CH. 3 (RS-422/RS-485)
×
(a) Use in the QD51
When the A1SD51S is replaced with the QD51, CH.3 (RS-422/485) interface is not available.
Modify the BASIC program so that other channels may be used, or use the QD51-R24.
(b) Use in the QD51-R24
Since the QD51-R24 does not have CH. 2 (RS-232) and CH. 4 (Parallel) interfaces is not allowed.
When the A1SD51S is replaced with the QD51-R24, CH.2 (RS-232) interface cannot be used.
Modify the BASIC program so that other channels may be used, or use the QD51.
(2) Communications specifications
Data bit and stop bit settings differ between the models. Correct the BASIC program.
Item
A1SD51S
QD51(-R24)
Data bit
5, 6, 7, 8
7, 8
Stop bit
1, 1.5, 2
1, 2
(3) Common memory backup
Common memory backup is as shown below.
Item
Common memory
A1SD51S
QD51(-R24)
Backed up
Not backed up
In the QD51 (-R24), common memory is not backed up by a battery. If backup is necessary, use the
programmable controller CPU's file register (R).
Modify the program that accesses the common memory using GETMEM and PUTMEM instructions to
access the file register (R) using PCRD and PCWT instructions.
4 - 24
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(4) Internal memory
(a) Memory to store a program to be executed
There is no difference between the QD51(-R24) and the A1SD51S.
(b) Communication memory
The communication memory for the A1SD51S can be accessed using only the special variable [email protected]/
[email protected] However, the communication memory for the QD51(-R24) can be also accessed using a
sequence program (FROM/TO instructions). (The function was added.)
There is no precaution for when using an A1SD51S program for the QD51(-R24).
• Communication memory of the A1SD51S
Address
Programmable
Item
BASIC program
controller CPU
Description
FROM/TO
GETMEM/PUTMEM
Special [email protected]/
instruction
instruction
[email protected]
Buffer memory
0000H to 0BFFH
0000H to 17FFH
-
Common memory
-
1800H to 37FFH
ED0000 to ED1023
Communication with a
programmable controller
CPU
Communication between
tasks
Reading/writing of the ON/
OFF data
Extension registers
-
-
System area
-
-
-
Extension relays
-
-
EM0000 to EM1023
System area
-
-
-
Special registers
-
-
ED9000 to ED9127
System area
-
-
-
Special relays
-
-
EM9000 to EM9127
System area
-
-
-
• Communication memory of the QD51(-R24)
Address
Programmable
Item
Description
BASIC program
controller CPU
FROM/TO
GETMEM/PUTMEM
Special [email protected]/
instruction
instruction
[email protected]
Buffer memory
0000H to 0BFFH
0000H to 17FFH
-
Common memory
0C00H to 1BFFH
1800H to 37FFH
-
Extension registers
1C00H to 1FFFH
-
ED0000 to ED1023
System area
-
-
-
Extension relays
2380H to 23BFH
-
EM0000 to EM1023
System area
-
-
-
Special registers
2400H to 247FH
-
ED9000 to ED9127
Communication with a
programmable controller
CPU
Communication between
tasks
Reading/writing of the ON/
OFF data
System area
-
-
-
Special relays
2500H to 2507H
-
EM9000 to EM9127
System area
-
-
-
4 - 25
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
(c) PCRD commands
Processing codes used in the AD51H-S3
Processing Code
Contents
Processing codes used in the QD51(-R24)
Processing Code
Contents
Monitoring of the devices registered by the PCWT
command
2(&H2)
4(&H4)
Reading of extension file register data
5(&H5)
Monitoring the extension file register registered by the
PCWT command
7(&H7)
Reading of continuous address designation data in the
extension file register
8(&H8)
Reading of sequence programs
9(&H9)
Reading of microcomputer programs
10(&HA)
Reading of comment data
515 (&H203)
Reading of Q/QnA series device memory
-
Cannot be replaced with Q/QnA series.
11(&HB)
Reading of extension comment data
12(&HC)
Reading of the buffer memories of a special function
module
533 (&H215)
Reading of the buffer memories of a Q/QnA series
intelligent function module
13(&HD)
Reading of the model name of a programmable controller
CPU
513 (&H201)
Reading of the model name of a Q/QnA programmable
controller CPU
14(&HE)
Reading of parameter data (Reading of MELSECNET/10
parameters)
21(&H15)
Reading of network information
22(&H16)
Reading of routing parameters
-
Cannot be replaced with Q/QnA series.
(d) PCWT command
Processing codes used in the AD51H-S3
Processing Code
Contents
2(&H2)
Device memory monitor registration
3(&H3)
Random writing to device memory
4(&H4)
Writing to extension file register
5(&H5)
Expansion file register monitor registration
6(&H6)
Random writing to extension file register
7(&H7)
Continuous address designation data writing to extension
file register
8(&H8)
Writing of sequence programs
9(&H9)
Writing of microcomputer programs
10(&HA)
Writing of comment data
11(&HB)
Writing of extension comment data
12(&HC)
Writing of the buffer memories of a special function
module
14(&HE)
Writing of parameter data (Writing of MELSECNET/10
parameters)
15(&HF)
Analysis of parameter data
Processing codes used in the QD51(-R24)
Processing Code
Contents
515 (&H203)
Writing of Q/QnA series device memory
-
Cannot be replaced with Q/QnA series.
533 (&H215)
-
Writing to the buffer memories of a Q/QnA series
intelligent function module
Cannot be replaced with Q/QnA series.
(5) DATE$ function
The processing of the DATE$ function differs. Therefore, modify the BASIC program.
Processing
4 - 26
A1SD51S
QD51(-R24)
Action
Reading
Reads only the last two digits of the year.
When the last two digits is 90 or greater,
the first two digits is 19. When the last two Reads all the four digits of the year.
digits is 89 or lower, the first two digits is
20.
Modify the program to use the four digits
for processing.
Writing
Writes only the last two digits of the year. Writes all the four digits of the year.
Selects the four digits.
4
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.6.3 Replacement of intelligent communication module AD51-S3
The BASIC program language of the QD51(-R24) differs from that of the AD51-S3. For this reason, the
program of the AD51-S3 programmed with GPC-BASIC is not reused for the QD51(-R24). Create a new
program with AD51H-BASIC.
4 - 27
5
AS-i MASTER MODULE REPLACEMENT
5
5
AS-i MASTER MODULE
REPLACEMENT
5.1 List of AS-i Master Modules to be Replaced
AnS/QnAS series model
Product name
Q series alternative model
Model
Model name
AS-i master module A1SJ71AS92
*1
QJ71AS92
Remarks (restrictions)
(1) Change in external wiring: Yes (2 systems  1 system 2 groups)*1
(2) Change in the number of slots: Yes
If the existing I/O slave uses two systems, it needs to be replaced by two modules.
(3) Program change: Change in I/O signals
If the existing I/O slave uses two systems, the buffer memory address needs to be changed.
(4) Change in performance specifications: Yes AS-i standard (AS-i Ver. 2.04 is compatible.)
(5) Change in function specifications: Yes Change in systems (2 systems  1 system 2 groups)
Wiring methods of system and series
(1) A1SJ71AS92 (2 systems)
A1SJ71AS92
AS-i system 1
AS-i cable
AS-i system 2
AS-i cable
AS-i system 1
slave address 2
AS-i system 2
slave address 1
AS-i system 1
AS-i power supply
AS-i system 1
slave address 1
AS-i system 2
slave address 2
AS-i system 2
AS-i power supply
(2) QJ71AS92 (1 system 2 groups)
QJ71AS92
AS-i slave
Ver.2.04
slave address 6
AS-i slave
address 1A
Analog slave
slave address 5
AS-i slave
address 2A
Group A
5-1
AS-i slave
address 4A
AS-i power
supply
AS-i slave
address 1B
AS-i slave
address 4B
Group B
5
AS-i MASTER MODULE REPLACEMENT
5.2 Performance Specifications Comparison
: Compatible,
Specifications
Item
A1SJ71AS92
QJ71AS92
AS-i Ver.2.04
AS-i Ver.2.04/2.11
Number of AS-i systems
2 systems
1 system
Grouping
Not possible
AS-i Ver.2.11 compatibility: Yes
AS-i Ver.2.04 compatibility: No
Connectable slave type
62 (A group: 31, B group: 31)*1
• AS-i Ver. 2.04-compatible I/O slave
• AS-i Ver. 2.11-compatible I/O slave
• AS-i Ver. 2.11-compatible analog slave
• Ver.2.04-compatible I/O slave
Max. number of I/
O points
(1 point = 1 bit)
Input
248 points (124 points × 2 systems)
248 points
Output
248 points (124 points × 2 systems)
248 points
Max. number of
analog I/O points
(1 point = 16 bits)
Input
-
124 points
Output
-
124 points
System/group are different.
If the existing configuration uses
2 systems, it needs to be
replaced by 2 modules.
Existing slave modules can be
used without changing.
Approx. 5ms (without I/O slave grouping)
Approx. 10ms (with I/O slave grouping)
Approx. 35ms (per analog slave channel)
Approx. 5ms (when maximum number of
input/output points are connected)
Communication speed
167kbps
Transmission distance
Maximum 100m/system
(max. 300m with two repeaters)
Max. 100m
(max. 300m with two repeaters)
Connection type
Bus network type, independent for each
system.
(Star, line, tree or ring)
Bus network type (star, line, tree and ring)
Communication method
APM modulation method (Alternating Pulse Modulation)
Error control system
Parity check
Internal memory
Flash ROM (for registering slave
configuration) Number of writes: 10,000
times or less
EEPROM (for parameter registration)
number of writes: 100,000 times
Number of occupied I/O
points
32 points (I/O assignment: special 32
points)
32 points (I/O assignment: 32 intelligent
points)
Cable type
Use dedicated AS-i cable.
Applicable solderless
terminal
R2-3.5, RAV 2-3.5, RAP 2-3.5, RBV 23.5, RBP 2-3.5 (JIS C2805 compliant)
-
30.5VDC
(supplied independently to each system
from AS-i power supply)
TYP. 30.5VDC
(supplied by AS-i power supply)
70mA/system (TYP 30.5VDC)
46mA (TYP 30.5VDC)
5VDC internal current
consumption
0.15A
0.40A
Weight
0.30kg
0.12kg
*1
Precautions for replacement
A1SJ71AS92 is not compatible.
Input/output refresh time
External Voltage
supply
power
Current
consumption
Compatibility
Compatible standards are
increased.
AS-i standard compliance
Max. number of AS-i slaves 62 (31 × 2 systems)
: Partly changed, ×: Incompatible
Functions are equivalent
although built-in memory is
different
Directly connected by peeling off
the cable cover and therefore
the solderless terminal needs to
be reprocessed.
Internal current consumption
(5VDC) needs to be
recalculated.
This is the maximum number of slaves when only Ver.2.11-compatible I/O slaves are configured.
If analog slaves and Ver.2.04-compatible I/O slaves coexist, calculate the number using the following formula.
(NIO-A+NIO-B)+2 × (NA+NIO)  62
NIO-A: Number of Ver.2.11-compatible A-group I/O slaves; NIO-B: Number of B-group I/O slaves, NA: Number of analog
slaves
NIO: Number of Ver.2.04-compatible I/O slaves
Slave type
AS-i Ver. 2.11-compatible I/O slave
AS-i Ver. 2.04-compatible I/O slave
AS-i Ver. 2.11-compatible analog slave
Grouping
Enabled (A-group, B-group)
Disabled
5-2
5
AS-i MASTER MODULE REPLACEMENT
5.3 Function Comparison
: Function available, -: Function unavailable
Item
Description
A1SJ71AS92
QJ71AS92
Precautions for replacement
AS-i slave communication function Communicates with AS-i slaves.
Automatic refresh function by
utility package
Automatically refreshes the Q71AS92's I/O data to the
CPU module's device memory.
Automatic slave address
assignment function
When a slave is replaced with a new one of the same
model, this function automatically assigns the previous
slave address to the new one that has slave address 0.
-
Sets slave addresses and QJ71AS92's parameters by the following:
Parameter setting function
• Utility package
-
• CODE LED and switches on the module's front
face.
-
• Sequence program
5-3
A1SJ71AS92 allows for this
function by using the FROM/TO
instructions in the sequence
program.
5
AS-i MASTER MODULE REPLACEMENT
5.4 Program Comparison
5.4.1 I/O signals
As different I/O signals are used, the sequence programs need to be reviewed and corrected.
For details of I/O signals, refer to the "AS-i Master Module User's Manual".
: Compatible,
Signal name
I/O signals
A1SJ71AS92
QJ71AS92
X00
Watchdog Timer Error
(WDT error)
Module Ready
X01
Unit Ready
Not used
X02
X03
Not used
AS-i Power Fail AS-i 1
AS-i Power Fail
X06
Normal Operation Active AS-i 1
Normal Operation Active
X07
Configuration Mode AS-i 1
Configuration Mode Active
X08
Not used
Config OK AS-i 2
X0B
Normal Operation Active AS-i 2
X0C
Configuration Mode AS-i 2
The device numbers of the same
function are different.
-
X05
AS-i Power Fail AS-i 2
×
-
Configuration Error
X09
Precautions for replacement
Configuration Register Completion
Config OK AS-i 1
X0A
Compatibility
Command Completion
X04
: Partly changed, ×: Incompatible
Not used
×
Not used
Not used
-
X10 to X1F
Not used
Not used
-
Y00 to Y0F
Not used
Not used
-
Not used
Not used
-
QJ71AS92 does not have AS-i 2.
X0D
X0E
X0F
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Not used
Command Execution Request
Configuration Register Request
Y14
Off-line Phase AS-i 1
Off-line Phase
Y15
Automatic Address Assignment Function Valid
AS-i 1
Auto Address Assignment Function
Y16
Configuration Mode AS-i 1
Configuration Mode
Y17
Protected Operation Mode AS-i 1
Protected Operation Mode
Y18
Off-line Phase AS-i 2
Y19
Automatic Address Assignment Function Valid
AS-i 2
Y1A
Configuration Mode AS-i 2
Not used
Y1B
Protected Operation Mode AS-i 2
Y1C
Flash ROM write
EEPROM Write
Y1D
Refresh Instruction
Refresh Instruction
Not used
Not used
Y1E
Y1F
-
This signal is added for
QJ71AS92.
×
QJ71AS92 does not have AS-i 2.
-
5-4
5
AS-i MASTER MODULE REPLACEMENT
5.4.2 Buffer memory
If A1SJ71AS92 AS-i 2 is replaced with B-group, I/O data storage buffer memory assignments differ from
part of setup buffer memory assignments, and therefore sequence programs need to be reviewed and
corrected.
For details of the buffer memory and sequence programs, refer to the "AS-i Master Module User's
Manual".
: Compatible,
Description
Address
Decimal (hexadecimal)
A1SJ71AS92
QJ71AS92
0000 (000H)
Input data from AS-i 1 slave 1 to 3 and
part of EC Flags
(A-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 1A-3A and part of EC Flag
0001 (001H)
Input data from AS-i 1 slave 4 to 7
(A-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 4A-7A
0002 (002H)
Input data from AS-i 1 slave 8 to 11
(A-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 8A-11A
0003 (003H)
Input data from AS-i 1 slave 12 to 15
(A-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 12A-15A
0004 (004H)
Input data from AS-i 1 slave 16 to 19
(A-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 16A-19A
0005 (005H)
Input data from AS-i 1 slave 20 to 23
(A-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 20A-23A
0006 (006H)
Input data from AS-i 1 slave 24 to 27
(A-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 24A-27A
0007 (007H)
Input data from AS-i 1 slave 28 to 31
(A-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 28A-31A
0008 (008H)
(B-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 1B-3B
0009 (009H)
(B-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 4B-7B
0010 (00AH)
(B-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 8B-11B
0011 (00BH)
(B-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 12B-15B
Not used
0012 (00CH)
(B-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 16B-19B
0013 (00DH)
(B-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 20B-23B
0014 (00EH)
(B-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 24B-27B
0015 (00FH)
(B-slaves) Input Data From Slave
Address 28B-31B
0016 (010H)
EC Flags AS-i 1
EC Flags
0017 (011H) to 0018 (012H)
LDS AS-i 1
(A-slaves) List of Detected Slaves (LDS)
0019 (013H) to 0020 (014H)
Not used
(B-slaves) List of Detected Slaves (LDS)
0021 (015H) to 0022 (016H)
LAS AS-i 1
(A-slaves) List of Active Slaves (LAS)
0023 (017H) to 0024 (018H)
0025 (019H) to 0026 (01AH)
(B-slaves) List of Active Slaves (LAS)
Not used
0029 (01DH) to 0030 (01EH)
5-5
List of slaves with configuration
differences AS-i 1
×
A1SJ71AS92 does not support
series grouping of A and B
groups, and therefore cannot
use the B group
×
A1SJ71AS92 does not support
series grouping of A and B
groups, and therefore cannot
use the B group
×
A1SJ71AS92 does not support
series grouping of A and B
groups, and therefore cannot
use the B group
×
A1SJ71AS92 does not support
series grouping of A and B
groups, and therefore cannot
use the B group
(A-slaves) List of Projected Slaves (LPS
(For Read))
(B-slaves) List of Projected Slaves (LPS
(For Read))
0027 (01BH) to 0028 (01CH)
: Partly changed, ×: Incompatible
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
(A-slaves) List of slaves that differ from
settings
5
AS-i MASTER MODULE REPLACEMENT
Description
Address
Decimal (hexadecimal)
A1SJ71AS92
0031 (01FH) to 0032 (020H)
Not used
QJ71AS92
(B-slaves) List of slaves that differ from
settings
0033 (021H) to 0034 (022H)
(A-slaves) Error Slave List
0035 (023H) to 0036 (024H)
(B-slaves) Error Slave List
0037 (025H) to 0041 (029H)
Command Buffer AS-i 1: <Result>
Command Buffer <Result>
0042 (02AH) to 0047 (02FH)
Not used
Not used
0048 (030H)
Output data from AS-i 1 slave 1 to 3
(A-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
1A-3A
0049 (031H)
Output data from AS-i 1 slave 4 to 7
(A-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
4A-7A
0050 (032H)
Output data from AS-i 1 slave 8 to 11
(A-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
8A-11A
0051 (033H)
Output data from AS-i 1 slave 12 to 15
(A-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
12A-15A
0052 (034H)
Output data from AS-i 1 slave 16 to 19
(A-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
16A-19A
0053 (035H)
Output data from AS-i 1 slave 20 to 23
(A-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
20A-23A
0054 (036H)
Output data from AS-i 1 slave 24 to 27
(A-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
24A-27A
0055 (037H)
Output data from AS-i 1 slave 28 to 31
(A-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
28A-31A
0056 (038H)
(B-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
1B-3B
0057 (039H)
(B-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
4B-7B
0058 (03AH)
(B-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
8B-11B
0059 (03BH)
Not used
(B-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
12B-15B
0060 (03CH)
(B-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
16B-19B
0061 (03DH)
(B-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
20B-23B
0062 (03EH)
(B-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
24B-27B
0063 (03FH)
(B-slaves) Output Data To Slave Address
28B-31B
0064 (040H) to 0072 (048H)
0073 (049H) to 0074 (04AH)
Not used
Not used
LPS AS-i 1 (For Write)
(A-slaves) List of Projected Slaves (LPS
(For Write))
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
×
A1SJ71AS92 does not support
series grouping of A and B
groups, and therefore cannot
use the B group
-
This function is added to
QJ71AS92.
-
×
-
(B-slaves) List of Projected Slaves (LPS
(For Write))
×
0077 (04DH) to 0084 (054H)
Not used
-
0085 (055H)
Command Buffer: <Request (Command)>
0075 (04BH) to 0076 (04CH)
0086 (056H) to 0089 (059H)
Not used
Command Buffer AS-i 1: <Command>
A1SJ71AS92 does not support
series grouping of A and B
groups, and therefore cannot
use the B group
A1SJ71AS92 does not support
series grouping of A and B
groups, and therefore cannot
use the B group
Command Buffer: <Request
(data word 0 to 3 (Command))>
5-6
5
AS-i MASTER MODULE REPLACEMENT
Description
Address
Decimal (hexadecimal)
A1SJ71AS92
0090 (05AH) to 0095 (05FH)
Not used
0096 (060H)
Input data from AS-i 2 slave 1 to 3 and
part of EC Flags
0097 (061H)
Input data from AS-i 2 slave 4 to 7
0098 (062H)
Input data from AS-i 2 slave 8 to 11
0099 (063H)
Input data from AS-i 2 slave 12 to 15
0100 (064H)
Input data from AS-i 2 slave 16 to 19
0101 (065H)
Input data from AS-i 2 slave 20 to 23
0102 (066H)
Input data from AS-i 2 slave 24 to 27
0103 (067H)
Input data from AS-i 2 slave 28 to 31
0104 (068H) to 0111 (06FH)
Not used
0112 (070H)
EC Flags AS-i 2
0113 (071H) to 0114 (072H)
LDS AS-i 2
0115 (073H) to 0116 (074H)
Not used
0117 (075H) to 0118 (076H)
LAS AS-i 2
0119 (077H) to 0120 (078H)
Not used
0121 (079H) to 0122 (07AH)
LPS AS-i 2
0123 (07BH) to 0124 (07CH)
Not used
0125 (07DH) to 0126 (07EH)
List of slaves with configuration
differences AS-i 2
0127 (07FH) to 0132 (084H)
Not used
0133 (085H) to 0137 (089H)
Command Buffer AS-i 2: <Result>
0138 (08AH) to 0143 (08FH)
Not used
0144 (090H)
Output data from AS-i 2 slave 1 to 3
0145 (091H)
Output data from AS-i 2 slave 4 to 7
0146 (092H)
Output data from AS-i 2 slave 8 to 11
0147 (093H)
Output data from AS-i 2 slave 12 to 15
0148 (094H)
Output data from AS-i 2 slave 16 to 19
0149 (095H)
Output data from AS-i 2 slave 20 to 23
0150 (096H)
Output data from AS-i 2 slave 24 to 27
0151 (097H)
Output data from AS-i 2 slave 28 to 31
0152 (098H) to 0168 (0A8H)
Not used
QJ71AS92
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
-
Not used
×
The B group cannot be used if
an existing Ver.2.04compatible I/O slave is used.
The master module needs to
be examined for the
replacement to 2 modules.
0169 (0A9H) to 0170 (0AAH) LPS AS-i 2
0171 (0ABH) to 0180 (0B4H) Not used
0181 (0B5H) to 0185 (0B9H)
Command Buffer AS-i 2: <Command>
0186 (0BAH)
Not used
0187 (0BBH) to 0191 (0BFH)
Not used
0192 (0C0H) to 0197 (0C5H)
Current Error Code, Error Code History 15
0198 (0C6H)
EEPROM Write Status
199 (0C7H) to 207 (0CFH)
Not used
208 (0D0H) to 209 (0D1H)
(A-slaves) List of Peripheral Faults (LPF)
210 (0D2H) to 211 (0D3H)
(B-slaves) List of Peripheral Faults (LPF)
212 (0D4H) to 223 (0DFH)
Not used
224 (0E0H) to 351 (15FH)
352 (160H) to 479 (1DFH)
(Not-used area)
Analog Input Data (Slave Address 1-31)
Analog Output Data (Slave Address 1-31)
480 (1E0H) to 511 (1FFH)
(A-slaves) Number of I/O Points
512 (200H) to 543 (21FH)
(B-slaves) Number of I/O Points
544 (220H) to 767 (2FFH)
Not used
768 (300H) to 877 (36DH)
Extended Command Buffer <Result>
878 (36EH) to 1023 (3FFH)
Not used
1024 (400H) to 1133 (46DH)
Extended Command Buffer
<Request(Data)>
1134 (46EH) to 2047 (7FFH)
Not used
5-7
-
-
This function is added to
QJ71AS92.
5
AS-i MASTER MODULE REPLACEMENT
5.5 Program Diversion
If the sequence program of the existing AnS series AS-i master module is diverted to the Q series AS-i
master module, the sequence program needs to be reviewed and corrected. Review and correct the
program as follows.
(1) I/O signals
Some different I/O signals are used and therefore the program needs to be reviewed and corrected in
this respect.
Correct the program by referring to Section 5.4 or the "AS-i Master Module User's Manual".
(2) Existing AS-i 2 program
Existing AS-i 2 cannot be replaced with the B group and therefore the master module needs to be
replaced with two modules.
For the program of existing AS-i 2, create a new program as one for the A group of the new master
module.
(3) Example of replacement
(a) Example of diversion of existing AS-i 1 program to one for the A group
1) Example of existing configuration
CPU
module
A1SJ71
AS92
X/Y0 to
1F
~
Input
module
~
X50 to
5F
Output
module
Y90 to
9F
AS-i 1 side
AS-i cable
Slave address 4
Slave address 4
CPU module
Input: 4 points → Y90 to Y93
Output: 4 points ← X50 to X53
AS-i power
supply
Slave address 5
Slave address 5
CPU module
Input: 4 points → Y94 to Y97
Output: 4 points ← X54 to X57
5-8
5
AS-i MASTER MODULE REPLACEMENT
2) Example of configuration after replacement
CPU
module
QJ71AS
92
~
X/Y0 to
1F
Input
module
~
X50 to
5F
Output
module
Y90 to
9F
AS-i 1 side
AS-i cable
Slave address 4
Slave address 4
CPU module
Input: 4 points → Y90 to Y93
Output: 4 points ← X50 to X53
AS-i power
supply
Slave address 5
Slave address 5
CPU module
Input: 4 points → Y94 to Y97
Output: 4 points ← X54 to X57
(b) Example of correction of existing program
1) Example of existing A1SJ71AS92 program
Read the LAS.
Turn the refresh instruction on.
Read the EC flag and slave 4 and 5 input data.
Output the input data to Y90 to Y97.
Output X50 to X53 to the slave 4 data bits 0 to 3.
Output X54 to X57 to the slave 5 data bits 0 to 3.
If a communication disabled slave is used for
slave 4, the output to the slave will be stopped.
If a communication disabled slave is used for
slave 5, the output to the slave will be stopped.
Write the slave 4 and 5 output data.
• Explanation of devices
X0
X1
X5
X6
X7
M104
M105
M200 to M203
M204 to M207
M300
M316 to M319
M320 to M323
5-9
: Watchdog Timer Error (OFF when normal)
: Module Ready (ON when normal)
: AS-i 1 AS-i Power Fail (OFF when normal)
: AS-i 1 normal operation check (OFF in normal operation)
: AS-i 1 configuration mode (OFF in other than configuration mode)
: ON when slave number 4 is in the communication enabled state
: ON when slave number 5 is in the communication enabled state
: Output data to slave number 4
: Output data to slave number 5
: AS-i Config_OK (OFF when normal)
: Input data from slave number 4
: Input data from slave number 5
5
AS-i MASTER MODULE REPLACEMENT
2) Example of corrected QJ71AS92 program
Read the LAS.
Turn the refresh instruction on.
Read the EC flag and slave 4 and 5 input data.
Output the input data to Y90 to Y97.
Output X50 to X53 to the slave 4 data bits 0 to 3.
Output X54 to X57 to the slave 5 data bits 0 to 3.
If a communication disabled slave is used for
slave 4, the output to the slave will be stopped.
If a communication disabled slave is used for
slave 5, the output to the slave will be stopped.
Write the slave 4 and 5 output data.
• Explanation of devices
X0
X5
X6
X7
M104
M105
M200 to M203
M204 to M207
M300
M316 to M319
M320 to M323
: Module Ready (ON when normal)
: AS-i Power Fail (OFF when normal)
: Normal Operation Check (OFF in normal operation)
: Configuration mode (OFF in other than configuration mode)
: ON when slave number 4 is in the communication enabled state
: ON when slave number 5 is in the communication enabled state
: Output data to slave number 4
: Output data to slave number 5
: Config_OK (OFF when normal)
: Input data from slave number 4
: Input data from slave number 5
5 - 10
6
MULTIDROP LINK MODULE REPLACEMENT
6
MULTIDROP LINK MODULE
REPLACEMENT
6
6.1 List of Multidrop Link Modules to be Replaced
A/AnS series model
Product name
Q series replacement model
Model
Model name
Master station/local station module AJ71C22(S1)
Computer link module
(When set to the multidrop link
function)
Computer link module
(When set to the multidrop link
function)
No replacement module
Consider to replace the current link to CC-Link
with the existing module configuration, or to keep
the multidrop link by mounting the existing
module to the QA (1S) extension base unit.
No replacement module
Consider to replace the current link to CC-Link
with the existing module configuration.
The A0J2(H) series module cannot be mounted
on the QA(1S) extension base unit and therefore
cannot be replaced with the multidrop link
function retained.
AJ71UC24
A1SJ71UC24-R4
A0J2-C214(S1)
Remarks (restrictions)
Remote I/O station module
A0J2C25
No replacement module
Consider to replace the current link to CC-Link.
Replacing an I/O module connected to A0J2C25
by using the renewal tool (*1) for A0J2 can
reduce man-hours such as eliminating the need
for changing the wiring.
Partner maker product
(Product enabling replacement to
CC-Link)
(Such as manifold solenoid valve)
No replacement module
Consider to replace the current link to CC-Link.
If there is a replacement module, contact the
partner maker for module selection and
specifications comparison.
No replacement module
Consider to keep the existing multidrop link by
mounting the existing module to the QA (1S)
extension base unit.
Partner maker product
(Product disabling replacement to
CC-Link)
*1
6-1
-
Manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.
6
MULTIDROP LINK MODULE REPLACEMENT
6.2 Replacement Configuration Examples
This section describes some examples of replacement configurations when replacing the multidrop link
function with CC-Link or continuously using the multidrop link by taking advantage of the QA(1S)
extension base unit.
(1) When the remote and local stations are all replaceable to CC-Link
The following shows a configuration example when the remote and local stations are all replaceable to
CC-Link.
● Example of existing multidrop link configuration
Master station
• AJ71C22(S1)
• AJ71UC24
• A1SJ71UC24-R4
• A0J2-C214(S1)
Remote I/O station
• A0J2C25
Local station
• AJ71C22(S1)
• AJ71UC24
• A0J2 I/O module
• A1SJ71UC24-R4
• A0J2-C214(S1)
Product from a partner
manufacturer
(Replaceable with CC-Link)
• Manifold solenoid valve
(Manufactured by SMC
Corporation)
● Example of CC-Link replacement configuration
Master station
• QJ61BT11N
Remote I/O station
• AJ65BTCF1-32D
• AJ65BTCF1-32T
Local station
• QJ61BT11N
CC-Link compatible product
from a partner manufacturer
• Manifold solenoid valve
(Manufactured by SMC
Corporation)
• Renewal tool for A0J2
(Manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)
(2) When the remote and local stations have some modules which cannot be replaced to
CC-Link
In the following replacement configuration example, the remote and location stations which enable
replacement to CC-Link are replaced to CC-Link, and any partner maker product hard to be replaced to
CC-Link is kept used with the existing multidrop link by mounting the existing master station module on
the QA(1S) extension base unit (thus the original network is converted to a two-network configuration).
● Example of existing multidrop link configuration
Master station
• AJ71C22(S1)
Remote I/O station
• A0J2C25
• AJ71UC24
• A1SJ71UC24-R4
Local station
• AJ71C22(S1)
• AJ71UC24
• A0J2 I/O module
• A0J2-C214(S1)
• A1SJ71UC24-R4
Product from a partner
manufacturer
(Difficult to replace with
CC-Link)
• A0J2-C214(S1)
● Example of when two networks are replaced using CC-Link replacement and existing multidrop link function continuously
Master station
• QJ61BT11N
Remote I/O station
• AJ65BTCF1-32D
• AJ65BTCF1-32T
Local station
• QJ61BT11N
• Renewal tool for A0J2
(Manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)
QA(1S) extension base unit
Existing master station module
Product from a partner manufacturer
(Difficult to replace with CC-Link)
6-2
6
MULTIDROP LINK MODULE REPLACEMENT
(3) When all modules of the remote and local stations are hard to be replaced to CC-Link
In the following replacement configuration example, the remote and location stations in which all
modules are hard to be replaced to CC-Link are kept used with the existing multidrop link by mounting
the existing master station module on the QA(1S) extension base unit.
● Example of existing multidrop link configuration
Master station
• AJ71C22(S1)
• AJ71UC24
• A1SJ71UC24-R4
• A0J2-C214(S1)
Product from a partner manufacturer
(Difficult to replace with CC-Link)
Product from a partner manufacturer
(Difficult to replace with CC-Link)
● Example of when existing multidrop link function is used continuously
QA(1S) extension base unit
Existing master station module
Product from a partner manufacturer
(Difficult to replace with CC-Link)
Product from a partner manufacturer
(Difficult to replace with CC-Link)
Point
(1)
(2)
(3)
6-3
The I/O modules of remote station A0J2C25 are A0J2 I/O modules.
Using the renewal tool for A0J2, Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd., for replacement to
CC-Link, can eliminate the need for mounting hole drilling for the replacement module and
enables diversion of I/O external wiring, and thus can reduce replacement man-hours.
For more information, refer to the "Transition from MELSECNET/MINI-S3, A2C (I/O) to CC-Link
Handbook".
For partner maker products, ask the relevant partner maker whether they have replacement
products having the equivalent functions and specifications with regard to CC-Link.
For information on where to ask, check the home page of "CC-Link Partner Association".
Some partner maker products may be hard to be replaced to CC-Link due to their unique
functions. Keep using these products under control of the existing multidrop link function by
mounting the existing master module on the QA(1S) extension base unit.
Note that when A0J2-C214(S1) is used with CPU module A0J2(H)CPU, the QA(1S) extension
base unit cannot be used.
Note also that new purchases of existing modules are not possible and that the repair acceptance
period cannot be extended.
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
7
7.1 List of MODBUS® Modules to be Replaced
A/AnS series model
Q series replacement model
AJ71UC24-S2
A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
QJ71MB91
Remarks
RS-232: 1ch, RS-422/485: 1ch
QJ71MB91 supports the operations of both master
and slave stations.
7-1
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
7.2 Performance Specifications Comparison
7.2.1 Module performance comparison
: Compatible
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
Specifications
Item
RS-232
Number of
interfaces
RS-422/485
Specifications
Transmission speed
Transmission
distance
(Overall cable
distance)
RS-232
RS-422/485
A/AnS series
Q series
AJ71UC24-S2
A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
QJ71MB91
RS-232 compliant (D-Sub25P)
AJ71UC24-S2: 1ch
RS-232 compliant (D-Sub9P)
A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2: 1ch
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2: None
RS-232 compliant (D-Sub9P)
QJ71MB91: 1ch
RS-422/485 compliant
AJ71UC24-S2: 1ch
A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2: None
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2: 1ch
RS-422/485 compliant
(Two-piece terminal block)
QJ71MB91: 1ch
300 to 19,200bps
(Selection by switch)
300 to 115,200bps
(2 channel total)
15 m maximum
15 m maximum
500 m maximum (overall cable
distance)
1200 m maximum (overall cable
distance)
Communication
enabled
Number of
slave stations
Communication
by dedicated
instructions
(MBRW
instruction,
MBREQ
instruction)
Automatic
response
function
Slave function
Number of
simultaneous
executable
instructions
(Master function not supported)
4k words
-
MBRW instruction: 9 functions
MBREQ instruction: 19 functions
Max. 253 bytes per instruction
Output area
size
Max. 253 bytes per instruction
13 functions
17 functions
Coil
10,000 points
64k points
Input
-
64k points
Input register
device size
Holding register
Extended file
register
Number of simultaneously
receivable request messages
Station No.
-
64k points
10,000 points
64k points
8k points
Max 4,086k points
1 request per channel
1 request per channel
AJ71UC24-S2: 1 to 99
A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2: A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2: 1 to 99
1 to 247
5VDC internal current consumption
AJ71UC24-S2: 1.40A
A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2: 0.10A
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2: 0.10A
0.31A
Weight
AJ71UC24-S2: 0.63kg
A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2: 0.22kg
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2: 0.25kg
0.20kg
7-2
QJ71MB91 supports the
operation of the master
station.
1 instruction per channel
Input area size
MODBUS®
Wiring needs to be
changed.
4k words
Function (for
transmission)
Function (for
receiving)
Replacement from
AJ71UC24-S2 requires
changing the connector.
7 functions
Input area size
Master
function
Precautions for
replacement
Max. 32 per channel
Automatic
Function (for
communication
transmission)
Output area
size
Compatibility
Functions have been
improved.
The current capacity
needs to be reviewed
because current
consumption will be
increased.
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
7.2.2 Cable specification comparison
: Compatible
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
Specifications
Item
Cable
A/AnS series
Q series
AJ71UC24-S2
A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
QJ71MB91
External wiring compatible
connector
(Module side of connection
cable)
Cable
RS-422/485
Precautions for
replacement
Use cables compliant with the RS-232C standard.*1
Cable length
RS-232
Compatibility
Max. 15m
AJ71UC24-S2: D-Sub 25P
A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2: D-Sub 9P
(Male, screwing type)
(Mating screw M2.6)
D-Sub 9P
(Male, screwing type)
(Mating screw M2.6)
Item
Description
Cable type
Shielded cable
Number of twists
3P
Conductor resistance (20°C)
88.0/km or less
Insulation resistance
10000M-km or more
Withstand voltage
500VDC for 1 minute
Capacitance (1kHz)
Average 60nF/km or less
Characteristic impedance
(100kHz)
110±10
Replacement from
AJ71UC24-S2 requires
changing the connector.
*1
Cable length
External wiring compatible
connector
(Module side of connection
cable)
*1
Max. 500m (overall cable distance)
Max. 1,200m (overall cable distance)
Connected to terminal block
Refer to the manual for
the connection method.
The recommended cables of RS-232 and RS-422/485 are described in the manual of the Q Series MODBUS® Interface
Module.
7-3
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
7.3 Function Comparison
: Function available
Function
Master
function
Automatic
communication
Description
Automatically issues device read/write request messages from the
master (QJ71MB91) to a MODBUS® compatible slave device.
Communication by
Allows reading/writing of MODBUS® devices at any timing with a
dedicated instructions sequence program.
Automatic response
function
MODBUS® device
assignment function
Slave function
Link operation
function
A/AnS
-
: Partly restricted -: Function unavailable
Q
Precautions for replacement
The master function has been
added to QJ71MB91.
Automatically performs the processing corresponding to the
function code in the request message received from the master, and
automatically sends a response message.
Automatically converts access from the slave to a MODBUS®
device into access to a QCPU device.
Users can assign any access destination.
This allows direct access from the MODBUS® compatible master
device to the programmable controller CPU device memory.
This function allows the master connected to CH1 (RS-232)
communicate with several slave stations connected to CH2 (RS422/485).
If the link operation function is used, a RS-232 interface (1-to-1
Among the modules of the A/
AnS series, only AJ71UC24-S2
has the link operation function.
communication) MODBUS® master device can communicate with
several MODBUS® slave devices.
Status check function
Checks the operations of the module itself and the send/receive functions.
Hardware test
Tests the RAM and ROM of the QJ71MB91.
Self-loopback test
This test checks the send/receive function of the module and
communications with the programmable controller CPU.
-
By using the utility package (GX Configurator-MB), parameters
Various settings using utility package
(GX Configurator-MB)
such as automatic communication parameters or MODBUS® device
assignment parameters can be set on-screen, and status
monitoring is available.
This makes the parameter setting and status monitoring easier.
-
No utility package is compatible
with the A/AnS series. Set
parameters using the sequence
program.
-
The A/AnS series is not
compatible with GX Works2.
Set parameters using the
sequence program.
By using the programming tool (GX Works2), parameters such as
Various settings using programming
tool (GX Works2)
7-4
switch setting, automatic communication parameters, or MODBUS®
device assignment parameters.
This makes the parameter setting easier.
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
7.4 Switch Settings Comparison
(1) Comparison between AJ71UC24-S2 and QJ71MB91
: Compatible
Description
Switch name
A series
Q series
AJ71UC24-S2
QJ71MB91
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
Used to set the mode in each interface depending on the data communication function used.
Switch
RS-232C
RS-422/485
0
MODBUS® protocol
Unusable
1
Unusable
MODBUS® protocol
Mode Setting
Switch
MODBUS® protocol  MODBUS® protocol
2
3 to E
Unusable
F
For self-loopback test
*1
Set the mode using GX
Developer PLC parameter
"Intelligent function module
switch setting" or GX Works2
project "Intelligent function
module".
Master function: 00H
Slave function: 1H to F7H
Set the switch using GX
Developer PLC parameter
"Intelligent function module
switch setting" or GX Works2
project "Intelligent function
module".
Set the station number of the module used for communication.
Station No. setting
switch
01 to 99
(1 to 247)*1
SW11
SW12
Transmission
specifications
setting switch
Main channel
setting
*2
Character code
setting*3
Set the target interface for send
processing and receive processing
when 2 is set in the mode setting.
Set the character code of the data to
be sent or received. (RTU: 8 bits/
ASCII: 7 bits)
SW13
Transmission
SW14
speed setting
SW15
Set the transmission speed at which
data is sent or received.
(300 to 19,200bps)
Parity bit
SW16 present/absent
setting
Specify whether to enable the parity
bit for the data to be sent or received.
(Enable/disable)
SW17
Set the type of the parity bit to be
Even/odd parity added to the data to be sent or
setting
received.
(Even/Odd)
SW18 Stop bit setting
Set the stop bit length of the data to
be sent or received.
(2 stop bits/1 stop bit)
SW21 Not used
-
Write during
SW22 RUN enabled/
disabled
Specify whether to enable/disable
online program change during data
communication.
(Enable/disable)
SW23 Not used
(Always ON)
SW24 Not used
*1
Set the switch using GX
Developer PLC parameter
"Intelligent function module
switch setting" or GX Works2
project "Intelligent function
module".
-
*1
Refer to the point.
*2
In QJ71MB91, the RS-232 side is set to the main channel by performing link operation setting.
*3
In QJ71MB91, it is referred to as "frame mode".
7-5
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Comparison between A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2/A1SJ71-R4-S2 and QJ71MB91
: Function available
: Partly restricted -: Function unavailable
Description
Switch name
AnS series
Q series
A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
QJ71MB91
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
Used to set the mode in each interface depending on the data communication function used.
● A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2
Mode setting
switch
Switch
RS-232C
0
MODBUS® protocol
RS-422/485
Unusable
1 to E
Not available
F
For self-loopback test
● A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2
Switch
*1
RS-232C
0
RS-422/485
Not available
1
Set the switch using GX
Developer PLC parameter
"Intelligent function module
switch setting" or GX Works2
project "Intelligent function
module".
MODBUS® protocol
-
2 to E
Not available
F
For self-loopback test
Set the station number of the module used for communication.
Station No. setting
switch
● A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2: - (No station number setting)
● A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2: 01 to 99
(Master function: 00H
Slave function: 1H to F7H
(1 to 247))*1
Transmission
specifications
setting switch
SW01 Not used
-
SW02 Not used
(Always ON)
SW03 Not used
-
Online program
change
SW04
enable/disable
setting
Specify whether to enable/disable
online program change during data
communication.
(Enable/disable)
SW05
Transmission
SW06
speed setting
SW07
Set the transmission speed at which
data is sent or received.
(300 to 19,200bps)
Set the character code of the data to
Character code
be sent or received.
SW08
*2
setting
(RTU: 8 bits/ASCII: 7 bits)
Parity bit
SW09 present/absent
setting
SW10
Set the type of the parity bit to be
Even/odd parity
added to the data to be sent or
setting
received. (Even/Odd)
SW11
Stop bit setting
SW12 Not used
7-6
Specify whether to enable the parity
bit for the data to be sent or received.
(Enable/disable)
Set the stop bit length of the data to
be sent or received.
(2 bits/1 bit)
-
*1
Refer to the point.
*2
In QJ71MB91, it is referred to as "frame mode".
*1
Set the switch using GX
Developer PLC parameter
"Intelligent function module
switch setting" or GX Works2
project "Intelligent function
module".
Set the switch using GX
Developer PLC parameter
"Intelligent function module
switch setting" or GX Works2
project "Intelligent function
module".
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
Point
(1)
Example of GX Developer intelligent function module switch settings
(a) Mode setting example
Set value
Operation mode
Switch 1
Switch 3
CH1
CH2
0000H
0000H
Master function
Master function
0000H
0001H
Master function
Slave function
0001H
0000H
Slave function
Master function
0001H
0001H
Slave function
Slave function
0002H
0002H
000DH
000DH
000EH
000DH
Self-loopback test
-
000DH
000EH
-
Self-loopback test
000EH
000EH
Self-loopback test
Self-loopback test
Link operation (slave function)
Hardware test
(b) Station No. setting example
Switch 5
Upper byte
Lower byte
Channel 2 station number
Channel 1 station number
(c) Communication speed/transmission settings
Switch 2
(Channel 1)
Switch 4
(Channel 2)
(2)
*
Upper byte
Lower byte
Communication speed setting
Transmission setting
GX Works2 intelligent function module setting window
For details of switch setting, refer to the "MODBUS® Interface Module User's Manual".
7-7
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
7.5 Program Comparison
7.5.1 I/O signals
The A/AnS series MODBUS® interface module and the Q series MODBUS® interface module are not
compatible with regard to the assignments of I/O signals. Review and correct the sequence program as
follows.
Signal name
Input signal
AJ71UC24-S2/A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2/A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
Input signal
X00
RS-232C communication error
(* Cannot be used with A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2)
X00
X01
RS-422/485 communication error
(* Cannot be used with A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2)
X01
X02
X02
X03
X03
QJ71MB91
Module READY
ON: Accessible
OFF: Inaccessible
Use prohibited
X04
CH1 Automatic communication parameter setting, normally
completed
ON: Normally completed
OFF: -
X05
X05
CH1 Automatic communication parameter setting, error
completed
ON: Error completed
OFF: -
X06
X06
CH1 Automatic communication operation status
ON: Operating
OFF: Stopped
X07
CH1 Automatic communication error status
ON: Error occurred
OFF: No error
X08
MODBUS® device assignment parameter setting, normally
completed
ON: Normally completed
OFF: -
X09
X09
MODBUS® device assignment parameter setting, error
completed
ON: Error completed
OFF: -
X0A
X0A
MODBUS® device assignment parameter setting existence
ON: Parameters set
OFF: No parameters set
X0B
Use prohibited
X0C
CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting, normally
completed
ON: Normally completed
OFF: -
X0D
CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting, error
completed
ON: Error completed
OFF: -
X0E
CH2 Automatic communication operation status
ON: Operating
OFF: Stopped
X0F
CH2 Automatic communication error status
ON: Error occurred
OFF: No error
X04
Unusable
X07
X08
Ready signal
Parameter error
Unusable
X0B
X0C
X0D
Watchdog timer error
X0E
Unusable
X0F
7-8
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
Signal name
Input signal
AJ71UC24-S2/A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2/A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
X10
Input signal
X10
X11
X11
X12
X12
X13
X13
X14
X14
X15
X15
X16
X16
X17
X17
X18
X18
X19
X1A
Not used (unusable)
QJ71MB91
Intelligent function module switch setting change status
ON: Setting being changed
OFF: Setting not changed
Use prohibited
X19
X1A
X1B
X1B
CH Common/CH1 Error
ON: Error occurred
OFF: No error
X1C
X1C
CH2 Error
ON: Error occurred
OFF: No error
X1D
X1D
X1E
X1E
X1F
X1F
Use prohibited
Watch dog timer error
ON: Module error occurred
OFF: Module operating normally
7-9
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
Signal name
Output signal
AJ71UC24-S2/A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2/A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
Output signal
Y00
Y00
Y01
Y01
Y02
Y02
Y03
Y03
QJ71MB91
Use prohibited
Y04
Y04
CH1 Automatic communication parameter setting request/
automatic communication start request
ON: Being requested
OFF: Not requested
Y05
Y05
Use prohibited
Y06
Y06
CH1 Automatic communication stop request
ON: Being requested
OFF: Not requested
Y07
Y07
Use prohibited
Y08
MODBUS® device assignment parameter setting request
ON: Being requested
OFF: Not requested
Y08
Not used (unusable)
Y09
Y09
Y0A
Y0A
Y0B
Y0B
Use prohibited
Y0C
Y0C
CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting request/
automatic communication start request
ON: Being requested
OFF: Not requested
Y0D
Y0D
Use prohibited
Y0E
Y0E
CH2 Automatic communication stop request
ON: Being requested
OFF: Not requested
Y0F
Y0F
Y10
RS-232C communication error cancel
(* Cannot be used with A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2)
Y10
Y11
RS-422/485 communication error cancel
(* Cannot be used with A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2)
Y11
Y12
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y13
Unusable
Y15
Use prohibited
Y15
Y16
Y17
Y14
Y16
Parameter change request
Y18
Y17
Y18
Y19
Y19
Y1A
Y1A
Y1B
Y1B
CH Common/CH1 Error clear request
ON: Being requested
OFF: Not requested
Y1C
Y1C
CH2 Error clear request
ON: Being requested
OFF: Not requested
Y1D
Y1D
Y1E
Y1E
Y1F
Y1F
Unusable
7 - 10
Use prohibited
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
7.5.2 Buffer memory
The A/AnS series MODBUS® interface module and the Q series MODBUS® interface module are not
compatible with regard to the assignments of buffer memory. Review and correct the sequence program
as follows.
Description
Address
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
AJ71UC24-S2/A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2/
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
Name
Address
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
0000H
(0)
Mode setting status storage area
0001H
(1)
Station number setting status storage
area
0002H
(2)
RS-232C error response code
storage area
0002H
(2)
0003H
(3)
RS-232C error detail code storage
area
0003H
(3)
0004H
(4)
RS-422/485 error response code
storage area
0004H
(4)
0005H
(5)
RS-422/485 detail response code
storage area
0005H
(5)
0006H
(6)
RS-232C error LED indicator status
storage area
0006H
(6)
0007H
(7)
RS-422/485 error LED indicator
status storage area
0007H
(7)
0008H
(8)
RS-232C error LED OFF request
storage area
0008H
(8)
0009H
(9)
RS-422/485 error LED OFF request
storage area
0009H
(9)
000AH
(10)
000BH
(11)
000CH
(12)
000DH to 000FH
(13 to 15)
Error status read
device No.
storage area
Device code
Device No.
Optional function (computer link
function)
function code change request
storage area
Vacant area
0000H to 0001H
(0 to 1)
000AH
(10)
000BH
(11)
000CH
(12)
QJ71MB91
Application
Name
System area (use prohibited)
CH1 side error response code storage
area
System area (use prohibited)
Error code
Status storage
area
System area (use prohibited)
Detailed LED
status
Detailed LED
clear request
Setting area
CH2 side error response code storage
area
Setting error
status read
device
CH1 side detailed LED status storage area
CH2 side detailed LED status storage area
CH1 side detailed LED clear request
storage area
CH2 side detailed LED clear request
storage area
Device code
Head device number
System area (use prohibited)
000DH
(13)
CPU response monitoring timer value
Set time = set value × 500ms
000EH
(14)
Access target (when mounted to
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station)
000FH
(15)
Allocated error status area
7 - 11
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
Description
Address
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
AJ71UC24-S2/A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2/
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
Name
0010H to 0023H
(16 to 35)
Allocation for window for coils
0024H to 002FH
(36 to 47)
Vacant area
0030H to 0043H
(48 to 67)
Allocation for window for latch
registers
Address
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
0010H to 01FFH
(16 to 511)
QJ71MB91
Application
Name
System area (use prohibited)
0200H to 0201H
(512 to 513)
Setting parameter existence
0202H
(514)
Target station No.
0203H
(515)
Request interval timer value
Set time = set value × 10ms
0204H
(516)
Response monitoring timer value/
Broadcast delay value
Set time = set value × 10ms
Type specification of the target MODBUS®
CH1 Automatic device
Head buffer memory
communication
address
parameter 1
0205H
(517)
0206H
(518)
0207H
(519)
0044H to 0DEFH
(68 to 3551)
User area
0208H
(520)
Read setting
Automatic
communication
parameter
Access points
0209H
(521)
Head buffer memory
address
020AH
(522)
Write setting
020BH
(523)
Target MODBUS® device
head number
Access points
020CH to 037FH
(524 to 895)
CH1 Automatic
communication (Same as CH1 Automatic communication
parameter 2 to parameter 1)
32
0380H to 04FFH
(896 to 1279)
CH2 Automatic
communication (Same as CH1 Automatic communication
parameter 1 to parameter 1)
32
0500H to 08FFH
(1280 to 2303)
7 - 12
Target MODBUS® device
head number
System area (use prohibited)
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
Description
Address
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
AJ71UC24-S2/A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2/
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
Name
Address
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
QJ71MB91
Application
Name
0900H
(2304)
Device code
0901H
(2305)
Coil assignment
1
0902H
(2306)
0903H
(2307)
Coil assignment
(Same as in Coil assignment 1)
2 to 16
0940H
(2368)
Device code
0941H
(2369)
Input
assignment 1
0942H
(2370)
0943H
(2371)
0980H
(2432)
0981H
(2433)
0044H to 0DEFH
(68 to 3551)
MODBUS®
device
assignment
parameter
Device code
Input register
assignment 1
Device code
09C1H
(2497)
Holding register
assignment 1
09C2H
(2498)
09C3H
(2499)
Head device number
Head input register number
Assignment points
Holding register
assignment 2 to (Same as in holding register assignment 1)
16
09C4H to 09FFH
(2500 to 2559)
System area (use prohibited)
0C00H
(3072)
Switch 1: CH1 operation mode setting
status
0C01H
(3073)
0C04H
(3076)
Head input register number
Input register
assignment 2 to (Same as in input register assignment 1)
16
09C0H
(2496)
0C03H
(3075)
Head device number
Assignment points
0984H to 09BFH
(2436 to 2495)
0C02H
(3074)
Head coil number
Input
assignment 2 to (Same as input assignment 1)
16
0983H
(2435)
0A00H to 0BFFH
(2560 to 3071)
Head device number
Assignment points
0982H
(2434)
User area
Head coil number
Assignment points
0904H to 093FH
(2308 to 2367)
0944H to 097FH
(2372 to 2431)
Head device number
Setting status
Switch 2: CH1 transmission setting status
Intelligent
function module Switch 3: CH2 operation mode setting
status
switch setting
status
Switch 4: CH2 transmission setting status
Switch 5: CH1/CH2 Station No. setting
status
7 - 13
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
Description
Address
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
AJ71UC24-S2/A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2/
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
Name
Address
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
QJ71MB91
Application
0C05H
(3077)
Name
Module status
0C06H
(3078)
Switch 1: CH1 operation mode status
0C07H
(3079)
Switch 2: CH1 transmission status
Intelligent
function module
Switch 3: CH2 operation mode status
switch
operating status
Switch 4: CH2 transmission status
0C08H
(3080)
0C09H
(3081)
0C0AH
(3082)
Switch 5: CH1/CH2 Station No. status
0C0BH to 0C12H
(3083 to 3090)
System area (use prohibited)
0C13H
(3091)
MODBUS® device assignment parameter
error code storage area
0C14H
(3092)
MODBUS®
device
assignment
parameter
setting result
storage area
0C15H
(3093)
Parameter
error
information
0C16H
(3094)
0044H to 0DEFH
(68 to 3551)
User area
Error, device type
Error, assigned group No.
CH1 Automatic communication parameter
error code storage area
0C17H
(3095)
CH1 Automatic communication parameter
setting result storage area
0C18H
(3096)
CH2 Automatic communication parameter
error code storage area
0C19H
(3097)
CH2 Automatic communication parameter
setting result storage area
0C1AH to 0C1FH
(3098 to 3103)
Operating
status
System area (use prohibited)
0C20H to 0C21H
(3104 to 3105)
CH1 Automatic communication operation
status storage area
(Parameters 1 to 32)
0C22H to 0C23H
(3106 to 3107)
CH2 Automatic communication operation
status storage area
(Parameters 1 to 32)
0C24H to 0C27H
(3108 to 3111)
System area (use prohibited)
0C28H to 0C47H
(3112 to 3143)
0C48H to 0C67H
(3144 to 3175)
0C68H to 0CA7H
(3176 to 3239)
CH1 Automatic communication error code
storage area
Communication
(Parameters 1 to 32)
condition
CH2 Automatic communication error code
monitor area
storage area
(Parameters 1 to 32)
System area (use prohibited)
0CA8H to 0A9H
(3240 to 3241)
CH1 Automatic communication setting
status storage area
(Parameters 1 to 32)
0CAAH to 0CABH
(3242 to 3243)
CH2 Automatic communication setting
status storage area
(Parameters 1 to 32)
0CACH to 0CAFH
(3244 to 3247)
0CB0H to 0CB1H
(3248 to 3249)
0CB2H to 0CB3H
(3250 to 3251)
0CB4H to 0CFDH
(3252 to 3325)
7 - 14
LED ON status
System area (use prohibited)
CH1 Automatic communication ready
status storage area
Communication
(Parameters 1 to 32)
condition
CH2 Automatic communication ready
monitor area
status storage area
(Parameters 1 to 32)
System area (use prohibited)
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
Description
Address
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
0044H to 0DEFH
(68 to 3551)
AJ71UC24-S2/A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2/
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
Name
User area
Address
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
QJ71MB91
Application
Name
0CFEH
(3326)
Number of errors occurred
0CFFH
(3327)
Error log write pointer
0D00H
(3328)
Detailed error code
0D01H
(3329)
Exception code
0D02H
(3330)
Function code
0D03H
(3331)
Operating
status
Error log
Error log 1
0D04H
(3332)
Station No.
0D05H to 0D06H
(3333 to 3334)
System area (use
prohibited)
0D07H
(3335)
Function
0D08H to 0DEFH
(3336 to 3551)
0DF0H to 0DFFH
(3552 to 3583)
Use prohibited
0DF0H to 0DFFH
(3552 to 3583)
0E00H to 0EFFH
(3584 to 3839)
(Vacant area)
0E00H to 0EFFH
(3584 to 3839)
CH
Error log
2 to 32
(Same as Error log 1)
System area (use prohibited)
7 - 15
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
Description
QJ71MB91
Address
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
Application
Name
0F00H
(3840)
Bus message count
0F01H
(3841)
Bus communication error
count
0F02H
(3842)
Character overrun error
Diagnostic data
count
for Master/
Slave
Message discard count
0F03H
(3843)
0F04H
(3844)
Data discard count
0F05H
(3845)
Failed transmission count
0F06H
(3846)
Slave message count
0F07H
(3847)
Slave no-response count
0F08H
(3848)
Slave NAK count
0F09H
(3849)
0F0AH
(3850)
0F0BH
(3851)
0F0CH
(3852)
CH1
Communication
status
Slave busy count
Exception error count
Communications event
count
Communication
status
2nd byte of end code
0F0DH
(3853)
Communications mode
0F0EH
(3854)
Received exception error
count
0F0FH
(3855)
No-response count
0F10H
(3856)
Diagnostic data
Broadcast count
for Master
0F11H
(3857)
Received NAK count
0F12H
(3858)
Received busy count
0F13H to 0F1EH
(3859 to 3870)
System area (use prohibited)
0F1FH
(3871)
Communications event log
Communication
count
event log (for
Communications event log
Slave)
1 to 64
0F20H to 0F3FH
(3872 to 3903)
0F40H to 0F7FH
(3904 to 3967)
CH2
Communication (Same as CH1 communication status)
status
0F80H to 0FFDH
(3968 to 4093)
System area (use prohibited)
0FFEH
(4094)
0FFFH
(4095)
Hardware test result
Unit test result
Self-loopback test result
1000H to 1FFFH
(4096 to 8191)
2000H to 2FFFH
(8192 to 12287)
3000H to 3FFFH
(12288 to 16383)
CH1 Automatic communication function
buffer input area
Automatic communication
function buffer
4000H to 4FFFH
(16384 to 20479)
5000H to 5FFFH
User free area
(20480 to 204575)
7 - 16
Diagnostic data
for Slave
CH2 Automatic communication function
buffer input area
CH1 Automatic communication function
buffer output area
CH2 Automatic communication function
buffer output area
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
7.6 Program Diversion
If the sequence program of the existing A/AnS series MODBUS® interface module is diverted to the Q
series MODBUS® interface module, the sequence program needs to be reviewed and corrected.
Review and correct the program as follows.
(1) Communication setting (mode setting, transmission speed etc.)
The hardware switch setting is changed to the GX Developer Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting
or GX Works2 Intelligent Function Module Setting. Make settings by referring to the "MODBUS®
Interface Module User's Manual".
(2) I/O signals
The A/AnS series MODBUS® interface module and the Q series MODBUS® interface module are not
compatible with regard to the assignments of I/O signals. Review and correct the sequence program.
(3) Buffer memory
The A/AnS series MODBUS® interface module and the Q series MODBUS® interface module are not
compatible with regard to the assignments of buffer memory due to an increase of MODBUS® device
size and function addition.
Review and correct the sequence program.
Note that "RS-232C side" of the A/AnS series module in Section 7.5.2 corresponds to "CH1" of the Q
series module, and "RS-422/485 side" of the A/AnS series module corresponds to "CH2" of the Q series
module.
Point
Q series module QJ71MB91 allows for taking advantage of utility package GX Configurator-MB.
GX Configurator-MB is a tool for supporting the parameter setting, auto refresh, and monitor/test of
QJ71MB91.
Using GX Configurator-MB eliminates the need for the sequence programs for parameter setting and
auto refresh.
For more information including the setting method, refer to the "MODBUS® Interface Module User's
Manual".
7 - 17
7
MODBUS® MODULE REPLACEMENT
(4) Functions of the Utility Package GX Configurator-MB
Item
Description
Set the following items that require initial setting.
• Automatic communication parameter
Initial setting
Auto refresh setting
Monitor/test
• MODBUS® device assignment parameter
The initially set data are registered as programmable controller CPU parameters, and are
automatically written to the QJ71MB91 when the programmable controller CPU enters RUN status.
The QJ71MB91's buffer memory is configured for automatic refresh.
• Automatic communication function buffer input area
• Automatic communication function buffer output area
• Automatic communication operation status storage area
• User free area (input/output)
The QJ71MB91 buffer memory area data set for auto refresh are automatically read from or written to
the specified devices when the END instruction of the programmable controller CPU is executed.
The buffer memory and I/O signals of the QJ71MB91 are monitored or tested.
• Operation mode setting status
• Transmission setting status
• Station No. setting status
• Various module statuses
• X/Y Monitor/test
•
•
•
•
7 - 18
MODBUS® device assignment parameter status
Automatic communication status
Error log
Communication status
8
DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
8
DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
8
8.1 List of DeviceNet Modules to be Replaced
A/AnS series model
AJ71DN91
A1SJ71DN91
Alternative models
QJ71DN91
Remarks
Master modules are replaced by a master/slave
module.
8-1
8
DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
8.2 Performance Specifications Comparison
: Compatible
A/AnS series
Item
AJ71DN91
A1SJ71DN91
Node type
Compat- Precautions for
ibility
replacement
QJ71DN91
Group 2 only client
Station numbers that may be set
0 to 63
Number of connections that can be
generated
Master
function
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
Q series
63 for I/O communication and 63 for message communication
Send
I/O
communicati
Communicati on
Receive
on data size
Message
Send
communicati
Receive
on
2048 points
Up to 256 bytes per station
Max. 4096 points (512 bytes),
max. 256 bytes per node
2048 points
Up to 256 bytes per station
Max. 4096 points (512 bytes),
Up to 256 bytes per station
Max. 240 bytes
Max. 240 bytes
DeviceNet slaves
(Group 2 server)
Node type
Station numbers that may be set
Communication Slave
Number of connections that can be
function generated (I/O connections)
specifications
0 to 63
(Slave function not supported)
I/O
Send
Communicati
communicati
on data size
Receive
on
Communication speed
-
1 (polling)
New function of
QJ71DN91
Max. 1024 points (128 bytes)
Max. 1024 points (128 bytes)
Selectable from 125kbps, 250kbps and 500kbps.
Maximum trunk line
distance
Drop line length
Communication
Combination
speed
Thick Thin
of thick and Maximum Total
cables cables
thin cables
Maximum cable length*1
125kbaud
500m
250kbaud
250m 100m
500kbaud
100m
Current consumption required on the network
Number of writes to E2PROM
156m
See*2.
6m
78m
39m
26.5mA
30.0mA
Max. 100,000 times
-
Number of writes to flash ROM
-
Max. 100,000 times
Number of occupied I/O points
Special 32 points
32 points
(I/O allocation: Intelligent 32
points)
5VDC internal current consumption
Weight
0.17A
0.23kg
0.11kg
*1
The maximum cable length complies with the DeviceNet Specifications (Release 2.0) Volumes 1 and 2.
*2
The maximum transmission distance of the trunk line when thick and thin cables are both used is as follows.
Communication speed
8-2
0.24A
0.43kg
The memory
type is different.
Maximum transmission distance of trunk line when thick and thin cables coexist
125kbaud
Thick cable length + 5 × thin cable length  500m
250kbaud
Thick cable length + 2.5 × thin cable length  250m
500kbaud
Thick cable length + thin cable length  100m
8
DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
8.3 Function Comparison
(1) Comparison of master and slave functions
: Function available
Item
Master
function
Slave
function
Description
AJ71DN91
A1SJ71DN91
: Restricted -: Function unavailable
QJ71DN91
Precautions for replacement
The master node can exchange I/O data with each slave node (up to
63 nodes).
I/O
Transfer of 512 input bytes (up to 256 bytes per node) and 512
communication
output bytes (up to 256 bytes per node) is available.
The connection type can be selected for each slave node.
The master node can read/write the attribute data of the slave node.
For further details of message communication, refer to the
Message
DeviceNet common service in the DeviceNet Specifications
communication
(Release 2.0).
Up to 240 bytes of message data can be transferred at a time.
The slave node can exchange I/O data with the master node.
I/O
Transfer of 128 input bytes and 128 output bytes is available.
communication
The connection type is polling method.
This function has been added
to QJ71DN91.
A(1S)J71DN91 does not have
the slave function.
-
(2) Comparison of configuration functions
: Function available
Item
Description
AJ71DN91
A1SJ71DN91
QJ71DN91
: Restricted -: Function unavailable
Precautions for replacement
Own node setting
This function sets the number of the own node.
A(1S)J71DN91 uses the
sequence program for the
setting, and QJ71DN91 uses
the hardware switch for the
setting.
Communication speed
setting
This function sets the communication speed (baud rate).
QJ71DN91 sets the master and slave functions as well.
A(1S)J71DN91 uses the
sequence program for the
setting, and QJ71DN91 uses
the hardware switch for the
setting.
The following parameters in the buffer memory can be stored in the
flash ROM/E2ROM.
Saving parameters to
flash ROM/E2ROM
E2ROM inside A(1S)J71DN91
• Parameters for Master Function (Address: 01D4H to 03CFH)
Flash ROM inside QJ71DN91
• Parameters for Master Function (Address: 01D4H to 03CFH)
• Parameters for Slave Function (Address: 060EH, 060FH)
• Auto Communication Start Setting (Address: 0631H)
The parameters saved to the flash ROM/E2ROM are automatically
loaded to the buffer memory when power is turned on from off or
when the CPU module is reset.
Auto configuration
This function detects slave nodes on the network, allowing
automatic configuration of master function parameters.
A(1S)J71DN91
• Auto configuration is performed with configuration software.
QJ71DN91
• Auto configuration is performed when "Auto configuration request
Y15" is turned on.
Two options are available: "All configuration" used to detect all
slave nodes on the network
and "Add configuration" used to detect the slave node(s) added
to the network.
Programming steps for setting the master function parameters can
be reduced.
"Auto configuration request
Y15" is a function added to
QJ71DN91.
A(1S)J71DN91 requires
configuration software sold
separately if the master
function parameters are set
using something other than the
sequence program.
8-3
8
DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
8.4 Switch Settings Comparison
: Compatible
Switch name
Setting
A/AnS series
Q series
AJ71DN91/A1SJ71DN91
QJ71DN91
Node No. setting
switch
Own node number (own node
Setting into buffer memory
MAC ID)
Mode setting switch
Selection of master and slave
functions, and baud rate
Baud rate
Hardware test
-
Set the existing own node
number using the hardware
switch.
×
Conventionally only the master
function is available. Set 0 to 2
in accordance with the existing
baud rate.
Using the hardware switch on
the front panel of the
module
Hardware switch settings
Setting
Function
0
1
Master function
Operates as a slave node, at communication speed of 125k baud.
Slave function
5
Operates as a master and slave node, at communication speed of 125k baud.
Master and slave functions
8
9
Performs the ROM/RAM check and self-loopback test.
Performs the transmit/receive test, at communication speed of 125k baud.
Communication test
C
D to F
Operates as a master and slave node, at communication speed of 250k baud.
Operates as a master and slave node, at communication speed of 500k baud.
Hardware test
A
B
Operates as a slave node, at communication speed of 250k baud.
Operates as a slave node, at communication speed of 500k baud.
6
7
Operates as a master node, at communication speed of 250k baud.
Operates as a master node, at communication speed of 500k baud.
3
4
Description
Operates as a master node, at communication speed of 125k baud(factory default).
2
8-4
×
*1
Communication test
*1
Using the hardware switch on
the front panel of the module
Setting into buffer memory
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
Performs the transmit/receive test, at communication speed of 250k baud.
Performs the transmit/receive test, at communication speed of 500k baud.
Use prohibited
-
8
DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
8.5 Program Comparison
8.5.1 I/O signals
(1) Input signal
The input signals of AJ71DN91/A1SJ71DN91 and QJ71DN91 are the same except added functions.
When added functions are not used, existing programs can be used without modification.
: Compatible
Input signal
Signal name
AJ71DN91/A1SJ71DN91
X00
Watchdog Timer Error
X01
I/O Communicating
X02
Message Communication Completion
X03
Error Set Signal for Master Function
X04
Slave Down Signal
QJ71DN91
X05
Message Communication Error Signal
X06
Parameter being set
Saving Parameters to Flash ROM
X07
Parameter setting complete
Parameters Saved to Flash ROM
X08
Unusable
Error Set Signal for Slave Function
X09
Use prohibited
X0A
X0B
X0E
X0F
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
Precautions for replacement
A(1S)J71DN91 saves to E2ROM.
-
This function has been added to QJ71DN91.
(This function is for the slave function and is not
used for the master function.)
H/W Test in Progress
Unusable
X0C
X0D
Compatibility
H/W Test Completion
This function has been added to QJ71DN91.
H/W Test Error Detection
Use prohibited
-
Module Ready
X10
X11
X12
Use prohibited
-
X13
X14
X15
Unusable
Auto-Configuring
This function has been added to QJ71DN91.
Auto Configuration Completion
X16
X17
X18
X19
X1A
X1B
Use prohibited
-
X1C
X1D
X1E
X1F
8-5
8
DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Output signal
The input signals of AJ71DN91/A1SJ71DN91 and QJ71DN91 are the same except added functions.
When added functions are not used, existing programs can be used without modification.
: Compatible
Output signal
Signal name
AJ71DN91/A1SJ71DN91
QJ71DN91
Compatibility
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
Precautions for replacement
Y00
Y01
Y02
Y03
Y04
Y05
Y06
Y07
Y08
Use prohibited
-
Y09
Y0A
Y0B
Y0C
Y0D
Y0E
Y0F
Y10
Y11
I/O Communication Request
Y12
Message Communication Request
Y13
Error Reset Request for Master Function
Y14
Use prohibited
Y15
Unusable
Y16
Use prohibited
Y17
Parameter set request
Request for Saving Parameters to Flash
ROM
Y18
Unusable
Error Reset Request for Slave Function
Auto Configuration Request
This function has been added to QJ71DN91.
A(1S)J71DN91 saves to E2ROM.
-
Y19
Y1A
Y1B
Y1C
Y1D
Y1E
Y1F
8-6
Use prohibited
-
This function has been added to QJ71DN91.
(This function is for the slave function and is not
used for the master function.)
8
DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
8.5.2 Buffer memory
: Compatible
Address
(Hexadecimal)
Description
AJ71DN91/A1SJ71DN91
QJ71DN91
0000H to 007FH
Input data
(Stores input data from each slave station.)
0080H to 00FFH
Output data
(Stores output data for each slave station.)
Use prohibited
Precautions for replacement
×
The storage locations of I/O data are
different.
New address
Input (receive) data: 0700H to 07FFH
Output (Send) data: 0900H to 09FFH
0100H to 010FH
Use prohibited
0110H to 011FH
Message Communication Command
(A command for message communication is set.)
-
0120H to 012FH
Message Communication Result
(Stores result data of message communication.)
-
0130H to 01A7H
Message Communication Data
(Stores transmit and receive data of message communication.)
-
01A8H to 01A9H
Model display
(Setting is "DN91" in ASCII code)
-
Use prohibited
01AAH to 01AFH
Use prohibited
01B0H
Master Function Communication Status
(Stores the communication status of the master function.)
01B1H
Error Information for Master Function
(Stores a communication error code of the error occurred.)
01B2H
Bus Error Counter
(Stores an illegal frame count of the CAN chip (communication chip for DeviceNet)
when it exceeds 96.)
01B3H
Bus Off Counter
(Stores the number of times the QJ71DN91 was placed in the bus off status.)
01B4H to 01B7H
Node Configuration Status
(Stores parameter setting status of each slave node.)
Use prohibited
01BCH to 01BFH
Node Communication Status
(Stores I/O communication status of each slave node.)
01C0H to 01C3H
Not used
-
Node Communication Error Status
(Stores I/O communication error status of
each slave node.)
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
Node Fault Status
(Stores communication fault status of each slave node.)
Use prohibited
01CCH to 01CFH
Failed Node Detection Setting
(Whether or not to detect any failed node is set.)
01D0H to 01D3H
Use prohibited
Parameters for Master Function (Parameters for master function are set.)
Own station number (own station MAC ID)
01D5H
Baud rate
-
01D4H to 03CFH
01D4H
The storage locations of model
display are different.
New address: 0620H to 0624H
-
01C8H to 01CBH
×
Use prohibited
01D6H
01D7H
×
-
01B8H to 01BBH
01C4H to 01C7H
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
Compatibility
×
Set data using the hardware switch on
the front panel of the module
Unusable
Constant scan
(Specify to make the link scan time
constant.)
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
Setting of first slave node
01D8H to 01DFH (Set information including the connection type and the number of I/O points used for I/O
exchange with the first slave node.
01E0H to 03CFH
Setting of 2nd to 63rd slave nodes
8-7
8
DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
Address
(Hexadecimal)
Description
AJ71DN91/A1SJ71DN91
03D0H to 03EFH
QJ71DN91
Use prohibited
Compatibility
-
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
Auto Configuration Operation Setting
(Operation of auto configuration is set.)
03F0H
Precautions for replacement
03F1H to 04FFH
Use prohibited
0500H to 05FBH
I/O Address Area for Master Function (Stores the start
addresses and sizes (in word units) of Master Function
Receive Data (address: 0700H to 07FFH) and Master
Function Transmit Data (address: 0900H to 09FFH) for
slave nodes.)
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
05FCH
Present Link Scan Time
(Stores the current link scan time. (Unit: ms))
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
05FDH
Minimum Link Scan Time (Stores the minimum link scan
time after power-on. (Unit: ms))
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
05FEH
Maximum Link Scan Time (Stores the maximum link scan
time after power-on. (Unit: ms))
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
05FFH
Use prohibited
0600H
Slave Function Communication Status
(Stores the communication status of the slave function.)
0601H
Error Information for Slave Function
(Stores a communication error code of the error occurred in
the slave function.)
0602H to 060DH
Use prohibited
060EH
Slave Function Receive-Bytes Setting Area
(The I/O receive data size (bytes) for the slave function is
set.)
060FH
Slave Function Transmit-Bytes Setting Area
(The I/O transmit data size (bytes) for the slave function is
set.)
-
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
(This function is for the slave function
and is not used for the master
function.)
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
(This function is for the slave function
and is not used for the master
function.)
0610H to 061FH
Use prohibited
-
0620H to 0624H
Model Name
(Stores "QJ71DN91" in ASCII code.)
×
0625H
0626H
0627H to 062DH
(Reserved area)
The storage locations of model display
are different.
Existing address: 0620H to 0624H
Node No.
(Stores the number of the node currently in operation.)
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
Mode Switch No.
(Stores the mode switch number currently in operation.)
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
Use prohibited
-
062EH
Hardware Test Item Area
(Stores the test item number of the hardware test or
communication test that is currently being executed.)
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
062FH
Hardware Test Result Area (Stores the result of the
hardware test or communication test.)
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
0630H
Parameter Area Select Bit (Select the area of the
parameters to be saved to a flash ROM.)
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
0631H
Auto Communication Start Setting (Set whether or not to
auto-start I/O communication with parameters saved on the
flash ROM at the time of power on from off or CPU reset.)
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
0632H
Operation Setting Area for Bus Off Error (Set whether or not
to reset the QJ71DN91's CAN chip (communication chip) to
restart communications in the event of a bus off error.)
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
0633H to 06FFH
Use prohibited
-
0700H to 07FFH
Master Function Receive Data
(Stores the data received from each slave node.)
×
0800H to 08FFH
Use prohibited
-
0900H to 09FFH
Master Function Transmit Data
(Data to be sent to each slave node is set.)
×
0A00H to 0AFFH
Use prohibited
-
0B00H to 0B3FH
Slave Function Receive Data
(Stores the data received from the master node.)
8-8
The storage locations of input data are
different.
Existing address:
Input (receive) data: 0000H to 007FH
The storage locations of I/O data are
different.
Existing address:
Output (send) data: 0080H to 00FFH
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
(This function is for the slave function
and is not used for the master
function.)
8
DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
Address
(Hexadecimal)
Description
QJ71DN91
Compatibility
0B40H to 0BFFH
Use prohibited
-
0C00H to 0C3FH
Slave Function Transmit Data
(Data to be sent to the master node is set.)
0C40H to 7FFFH
AJ71DN91/A1SJ71DN91
(Reserved area)
Use prohibited
Precautions for replacement
This function has been added to
QJ71DN91.
(This function is for the slave function
and is not used for the master
function.)
-
8-9
8
DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
8.6 Program Diversion
When the sequence program of the existing A/AnS series DeviceNet master module is diverted, the
following points need to be reviewed or modified: buffer memory addresses are different, node number
setting methods are different, and so on.
When a sequence program is diverted, review and correct the program as follows.
(1) Own node number setting (MAC ID)
The setting using the TO instruction changes to the setting using the hardware switch on the front panel
of the module.
Make settings by referring to the "DeviceNet Master/Slave Module User's Manual" for details.
(2) Baud rate setting
The setting using the TO instruction changes to the setting using the hardware switch on the front panel
of the module.
The A/AnS series module has only the master function and simply sets the baud rate, but the Q series
module has the master and slave functions and needs to select the master and slave function as well.
Make settings by referring to the "DeviceNet Master/Slave Module User's Manual" for details.
(3) Input/output signal
The I/O signal addresses for the master function are the same.
(4) Buffer memory
(a) Input/output data storage area
Buffer memory addresses change due to an increase of input/output data sizes, function addition,
and so on.
The access destination addresses of the FROM-TO instruction need to be reviewed and modified.
If the parameters for slave node information setting are not changed, the devices assigned to I/O
data do not need to be changed.
(b) Parameter setting area for slave node information setting
The buffer memory addresses of the parameter setting area for slave node information setting are
equivalent.
If a sequence program is used to set parameters for slave node information setting, the program can
be diverted without modification.
Review and modify the program by referring to the "DeviceNet Master/Slave Module User's Manual"
for details.
(5) Parameter setting for slave node information setting
The A/AnS series module uses a sequence program or configuration software (sold separately) to set
these parameters.
The Q series module sets the parameters by auto configuration and can eliminate the need for creating
a sequence program.
Note that if auto configuration is used to set these parameters, they may differ from the contents of the
setting by the existing sequence program.
Make settings by referring to the "DeviceNet Master/Slave Module User's Manual" for details.
8 - 10
8
DeviceNet MODULE REPLACEMENT
(6) I/O data consistency dedicated instructions
QJ71DN91 has dedicated instructions to read/write I/O data while preventing data inconsistency.
To prevent I/O data inconsistency, correct/change the sequence program to the dedicated instructions.
(a) Dedicated instruction list
Dedicated instructions
Function overview
DNTMRD
This instruction reads data from the master function receive data area of the specified module while preventing data
inconsistency.
DNTMWR
This instruction writes data to the master function send data area of the specified module while preventing data
inconsistency.
DNTSRD
This instruction reads data from the slave function receive data area of the specified module while preventing data
inconsistency.
DNTSWR
This instruction writes data to the slave function send data area of the specified module while preventing data
inconsistency.
For details, refer to the "DeviceNet Master/Slave Module User's Manual".
8 - 11
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE
REPLACEMENT
9
9.1 List of PROFIBUS-DP Modules to be Replaced
Type
Master module
Slave module
*1
A/AnS series model
AJ71PB92D
A1SJ71PB92D
A1SJ71PB93D
Alternative models
QJ71PB92V
before using it.*1
QJ71PB93D
The QJ71PB92D compatibility function of QJ71PB92V is functionally compatible with AJ71PB92D/A1SJ71PB92D although
the I/O signals and buffer memory addresses are partly different.
9-1
Remarks
Set the QJ71PB92D compatibility function to QJ71PB92V
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.2 PROFIBUS-DP Master Module Replacement
9.2.1 Performance specifications comparison
: Compatible
A/AnS series
Item
AJ71PB92D
Q series module
A1SJ71PB92D
QJ71PB92V
(QJ71PB92D compatibility function)
PROFIBUS-DP station type
Class 1 master station (EN50170 compliant)
Electrical standard/
characteristics
EIA-RS485 compliant
Medium
Transmission specifications
Precautions for replacement
Shielded twisted pair cable
Built in the module
Terminating
(Selection of terminating resistor presence/
resistor
absence)
Mounted by user
(Terminating node only)
Network topology
Bus topology (Tree topology when repeaters are used)
Data link method
Between master station and master station: Token passing method
Between master station and slave station: Polling method
Encoding method
Differs depending on the transmission speed*1
Max. No. of repeaters
3 repeaters
Number of connectable
modules
(Per segment)
32 per segment (including repeater(s))
Number of connectable
modules
(Per network)
126 per network
(including master stations and slave stations)
Max. number of slave
notes
(per master node)
in terminating resistor.*3
60 per station (slave)
Input data
Normal service mode: 32 bytes per slave station
Extended service mode: Max. 1920 bytes (Max. 244 bytes per slave station)
Output data
Normal service mode: 32 bytes per slave station
Extended service mode: Max. 1920 bytes (Max. 244 bytes per slave station)
Max. 10,000 times
Number of writes to flash
ROM
Number of occupied I/O
points
When diverting the existing
cable, use a connector with built-
NRZ
Transmission distance
Number of writes to E2PROM
×
9.6kbps to 12Mbps*1
Transmission speed
Input data
size
Compatibility
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
-
-
Max. 100,000 times
32 (I/O assignment: 32 special points)
32 points (I/O assignment: 32
intelligent points)
5VDC internal current
consumption
0.54A
0.56A
0.57A
Weight
0.37kg
0.27kg
0.15kg
Functions are equivalent
although the memory type is
different.
9-2
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
*1 Transmission speeds and distances are summarized as follows.
Transmission speed
Transmission distance
Max. transmission distance when repeaters are
used*2
9.6kbps
1200m/segment
4800m/network
187.5kbps
1000m/segment
4000m/network
500kbps
400m/segment
1600m/network
1.5Mbps
200m/segment
800m/network
100m/segment
400m/network
19.2kbps
93.75kbps
3Mbps
6Mbps
12Mbps
*2
Each maximum transmission distance in the above table is an example when three repeaters are used. The following
shows the calculation formula when the transmission distance is extended using repeaters.
Max. transmission distance [m/network] = (number of repeaters + 1) × transmission distance [m/segment]
*3
When QJ71PB92V (QJ71PB92D compatibility function) is a terminal node, use a connector with built-in terminating resistor
that satisfies the following wiring specifications.
VP (6)
Ru = 390Ω±2%, min1/4W
RxD/TxD-P (3)
RtA = 220Ω±2%, min1/4W
RxD/TxD-N (8)
Rd = 390Ω±2%, min1/4W
DGND (5)
9-3
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.2.2 Compatible software package (configuration software)
: Compatible
AJ71PB92D
A1SJ71PB92D
Type
QJ71PB92V
Compat(QJ71PB92D compatibility function)
ibility
GX Configurator-DP Version 4 or later
Compatible software
GX Configurator-DP Version  or later
-
Precautions for replacement
There are some incompatible
versions.
Depends on the QCPU type.*2
SW0D5F-ProfiMap
MELSEC ProfiMap Version 2
MELSEC ProfiMap Version 3
package*1
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
×
Use GX Configurator-DP.
*1
The connection method of the PC in which the software package is installed differs. For details of the connection method,
*2
Compatible software package versions for individual CPU types
refer to the User's Manual of each module.
Software version
Installed QCPU
Programming tool
GX Developer
Configuration software
GX Works2
GX Configurator-DP
Version 5 or 6
Version 7.01B or later
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Version 7 or later
Q02/Q02H/Q06H/Q12H/
Q25HCPU
Version 4 or later
Version 4 or 6
Version 7.01B or later
Q02PH/Q06PHCPU
Version 8.68W or later
Version 7.04E or later
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Version 7.10L or later
Q12PRH/Q25PRHCPU
Version 8.17T or later
Version 7.03D or later
Version 8.76E or later
Version 7.04E or later
Q00UJCPU
Q00U/Q01UCPU
Version 1.11M or later
Version 1.86Q or later
Q02UCPU
Q03UD/Q04UDH/
Q06UDHCPU
Version 4 or 6
Version 7.01B or later
Version 7.04D or later
Version 8.48A or later
Version 1.11M or later
Version 7.02C or later
Q10UDH/Q20UDHCPU
Version 8.76E or later
Version 7.04E or later
Q13UDH/Q26UDHCPU
Version 8.62Q or later
Version 7.03D or later
Q03UDV/Q04UDV/
Q06UDV/Q13UDV/
Q26UDVCPU
Use prohibited
Q03UDE/Q04UDEH/
Q06UDEH/Q13UDEH/
Q26UDEHCPU
Version 8.68W or later
Q10UDEH/Q20UDEHCPU
Version 8.76E or later
Q50UDEH/Q100UDEHCPU
Use prohibited
Version 1.95Z or later
Version 1.11M or later
Version 7.09K or later
Version 7.03D or later
Version 7.04E or later
Version 1.25B or later
Version 7.07H or later
9-4
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.2.3 Function comparison
: Function available -: Function unavailable
Function
Description
A/AnS
Q
I/O data exchange
I/O data exchange with up to 60 DP-Slaves is performed.
Acquisition of diagnostic
and extended diagnostic
information
Diagnostic or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on a
DP-Slaves during I/O data exchange can be easily acquired using the
buffer memory and I/O signals.
Global control function
By sending services (SYNC, UNSYNC, FREEZE, UNFREEZE) to each
DP-Slave in a group, synchronous control of DP-Slave I/O data is
available.
This function swaps the upper and lower bytes in word units when I/O
data is sent and received.
Data swap function
-
Function added to QJ71PB92V
When I/O data from DP-Slaves are read from or written to the buffer memory, this function
prevents the I/O data from being separated and incorrectly mixed.
• Automatic refresh setting (GX Configurator-DP)
• Dedicated instructions (BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions)
Data consistency function
-
• FROM/TO instructions
Output status setting for the
case of a CPU stop error
-
This function sets whether to stop or continue I/O data exchange with DPSlaves when a CPU stop error occurs on a QCPU or remote I/O station
where the QJ71PB92V is mounted.
-
For prevention of data
inconsistency, change the
FROM/TO instructions to auto
refresh setting or dedicated
instructions.
Function added to QJ71PB92V
This function selects/sets the operation mode of A(1S)J71PB92D/
Operation mode switching
function
*1
Precautions for replacement
-
PROFIBUS-DPV0
Functions are equivalent
although the setting method
differs partly.
QJ71PB92V.*1
Use the sequence program (A/AnS/Q) or mode setting switch (A/AnS) for
the setting.
Operation mode list
: Function available -: Function unavailable
Operation mode change operation
Operation mode
Description
Operation
mode
Change
request
A/AnS
A/AnS
Q
Normal service mode
(MODE 0)
I/O data exchange with slave stations is performed in this mode.
The I/O area assigned to each slave station has a fixed capacity of 32 bytes.
-
Extended service mode
(MODE E)
I/O data exchange with slave stations is performed in this mode.
The I/O area for each slave station is assigned based on the variable data length (in
byte units) for each station.
The data length (in byte units) for each station is set as a slave parameter (Select
Modules) in GX Configurator-DP.
-
Parameter setting mode
(MODE 1)
The parameters set on GX Configurator-DP are written to QJ71PB92D in this
mode.
-
Self-diagnosis mode
(MODE 2)
The unit test on the QJ71PB92D is performed in this mode.
-
This mode is used to return the AJ71PB92D/A1SJ71PB92D to the factory default
status.
-
This mode is used to return the QJ71PB92V to the factory default status.
-
E2PROM
initialization
function
Flash ROM initialization
mode
9-5
Q
Mode Setting
Switch
-
-
-
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.2.4 Input/output signal comparison
(1) Input signal
Of the input signals, the "watchdog timer error signal" changes from X0D of AJ71PB92D/A1SJ71PB92D
to "X1F" of QJ71PB92V (QJ71PB92D compatibility function). Existing programs need to be corrected
when diverted.
: Compatible
Input
signal
Signal name
AJ71PB92D
A1SJ71PB92D
QJ71PB92V
(QJ71PB92D compatibility function)
X00
Exchange start end signal
X01
Communication trouble detection signal
X02
Communication trouble area clear end signal
X03
Use prohibited
X04
Global control end signal
X05
Global control error end signal
Compatibility
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
Precautions for replacement
-
X06
Use prohibited
...
-
X0C
X0D
Watchdog timer error signal
X0E
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
X0F
×
The device numbers of the same function are
different.
-
X10
Operation mode signal
X11
Operation mode change completion signal
X12
Use prohibited
...
-
X1A
X1B
Communication READY signal
X1C
Use prohibited
X1D
Module READY signal
X1E
X1F
Use prohibited
Use prohibited
-
Watchdog timer error signal
×
The device numbers of the same function are
different.
9-6
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Output signal
The output signals of AJ71PB92D/A1SJ71PB92D and QJ71PB92V (QJ71PB92D compatibility function)
are the same except the function of "Y0C: dedicated instruction effective signal" that has been added.
Existing programs do not need to be corrected when diverted (dedicated instructions are not used).
: Compatible
Output
signal
Signal name
AJ71PB92D
A1SJ71PB92D
QJ71PB92V
(QJ71PB92D compatibility function)
Y00
Exchange start request signal
Y01
Communication trouble detection signal reset
Y02
Communication trouble area clear request signal
Y03
Use prohibited
Y04
Global control request signal
Compatibility
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
Remarks
-
Y05
Use prohibited
...
-
Y0B
Y0C
Y0D
Use prohibited
Dedicated instruction compatible signal
added to QJ71PB92V
Dedicated instruction valid signal
Restart request signal
Y0E
...
Use prohibited
-
Y10
Y11
Operation mode change request signal
Y12
...
Y1F
9-7
Use prohibited
-
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.2.5 Buffer memory
The buffer memory of AJ71PB92D/A1SJ71PB92D and QJ71PB92V (QJ71PB92D compatibility
function) are assigned the same except a function added part. Existing programs can be diverted.
: Compatible
Address
Decimal
(hexadecimal)
Description
AJ71PB92D
A1SJ71PB92D
QJ71PB92V
(QJ71PB92D compatibility function)
0000 to 0959
(0000H to 3BFH)
Input area
(This area is for storing the input data from the slave.)
0960 to 1919
(3C0H to 77FH)
Output area
(This area is for storing the output data to the slave.)
1920 to 2039
(780H to 7F7H)
Address information area
(This area is for showing the station number of slave station and I/O data length.)
2040 to 2079
(7F8H to 81FH)
Communication trouble area
(This area is for showing the trouble information that occurred during communication.)
2080
(820H)
Slave error information cancel area
(This area is for setting the data that masks the slave trouble information.)
2081
(821H)
Global control area
(This area is the global control function hold/cancel selection area.)
2082 to 2083
(822H to 823H)
System area
(Use prohibited)
2084
(824H)
Trouble no information time setting area
(This area is used to set the time that does not inform the communication trouble after
the exchange start.)
2085 to 2095
(825H to 82FH)
System area
(Use prohibited)
2096 to 2110
(830H to 83EH)
Expansion communication trouble area
(This area shows the expansion information of the trouble information which is occurred
during the communication.)
2111
(83FH)
System area
(Use prohibited)
2112 to 2116
(840H to 844H)
Slave status area
(This area is for showing the status information of each slave.)
2117 to 2127
(845H to 84FH)
System area
(Use prohibited)
2128 to 2247
(850H to 8C7H)
Input/Output start address area (Extended service mode only)
(This area is for showing the addresses to start the input area and output area of each
slave.)
2248 to 2253
(8C8H to 8CDH)
System area
(Use prohibited)
2254
(8CEH)
Current operation mode
(This area indicates the operation mode of the QJ71PB92D when it has started up.)
2255
(8CFH)
Operation mode change request area
(In this area, set the operation mode of the QJ71PB92D which is to be changed.)
2256
(8D0H)
Operation mode change result area
(This area indicates the execution result of the operation mode change request.)
2257
(8D1H)
System area
(Use prohibited)
Compatibility
Self-diagnosis status code area
(Area in which the code indicating the status of the self-diagnosis during the execution
of the diagnosis is stored.)
2259 to 3775
(8D3H to EBFH)
System area
(Use prohibited)
Precautions for replacement
-
-
-
-
-
This area is added to QJ71PB92V
(QJ71PB92D compatibility function).
With the AJ71PB92D/
A1SJ71PB92D, check with the LED
indications on the front panel of the
module.
Local station number display area
(Area in which the station number of the
local station is stored.)
2258
(8D2H)
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
-
9-8
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.2.6 Program diversion
This section describes the methods of diverting parameters and programs when replacing the existing
AJ71PB92D/A1SJ71PB92D with QJ71PB92V (QJ71PB92D compatibility function).
(1) Parameter setting
(a) When configuration software ProfiMap is used
Configuration software ProfiMap cannot be used with the QJ71PB92V (QJ71PB92D compatibility
function).
Configuration software GX Configurator-DP (the available version depends on the CPU type) is
required.
Configuration software ProfiMap and GX Configurator-DP are not compatible with each other and not
subject to automatic conversion.
After checking the parameter settings of the existing module with configuration software ProfiMap,
the parameters need to be re-set with Configurator-DP.
(b) When configuration software GX Configurator-DP is used
After replacement, using the configuration software GX Configurator-DP corresponding to the CPU
type, the master module model name is selected and changed to the replacement module model
name. By doing this, the parameters of the existing module can be diverted to the project file for
QJ71PB92V (QJ71PB92D compatibility function).
This eliminates the need for new setting.
Point
The master module model name of GX Configurator-DP is selected and changed according to the
following procedure.
• GX Configurator-DP menu [File]  [Change Master Type]
Example: For GX Configurator-DP7.01B
For details including the method of setting with configuration software, refer to the manual of the
configuration software used.
Example: For GX Configurator-DP Version 7
GX Configurator-DP Version7 Operating Manual
9-9
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Data consistency function
The data consistency function guarantees data integrity when input data is read from each slave node to
the CPU device or when the CPU device is written to the output data of each slave node.
The data consistency function of existing AJ71PB92D/A1SJ71PB92D is implemented by reading/writing
data with the FROM/TO instructions. Alternative module QJ71PB92V (QJ71PB92D compatibility
function) implements that function in one of the following. Program correction or creation is required.
(a) Implementing data consistency using the dedicated instructions
Delete the existing FROM/TO instructions and create a new sequence program which reads/writes
data using the dedicated instructions.
• Dedicated instruction for reading input data: BBLKRD
• Dedicated instruction for writing output data: BBLKWR
The dedicated instructions read or write I/O data while keeping data consistency.
For details of the dedicated instructions, refer to the "QJ71PB92D/QJ71PB92V (QJ71PB92D
compatibility function) PROFIBUS-DP Interface Module User's Manual".
(b) Implementing data consistency using the auto refresh function
Delete the existing FROM/TO instructions and set the parameters for the auto refresh function using
GX Configurator-DP.
The auto refresh function set by parameters read or write I/O data while keeping data consistency.
Point
For details of the auto refresh function and dedicated instructions for data consistency, refer to the
"QJ71PB92D/QJ71PB92V (QJ71PB92D compatibility function) PROFIBUS-DP Interface Module User's
Manual".
9 - 10
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
(3) Notes on diverting sequence programs
(a) Data consistency program
As written in (2), delete the FROM/TO instructions read/write I/O data, and replace them with the auto
refresh function set by parameters or the dedicated instructions.
Note that when changing to the dedicated instructions, a program which turns on the signal "Y0C" to
enable the dedicated instructions need to be created additionally.
If data consistency is not taken into consideration, existing programs can be used without
modification.
(b) Input/output signals XY
• Watchdog timer error signal
Watchdog timer error signals are assigned differently as follows.
Existing programs need to be modified when diverted.
Signal name
Watchdog timer error signal
AJ71PB92D/A1SJ71PB92D
QJ71PB92V
(QJ71PB92D compatibility function)
X0D
X1F
(c) Buffer memory address
The buffer memory configurations of the existing module and alternative module are the same except
the own node number storage area, which is an additional function.
The FROM/TO instructions of the existing program do not need to be modified.
Note that the LED indication for the check of the own node number has been changed to the
confirmation data stored in buffer memory.
To check the own node number, create a program which reads "own node number display area: 2257
(8D1H)" added in the buffer memory.
9 - 11
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.3 PROFIBUS-DP Slave Module Replacement
9.3.1 Performance specifications comparison
: Compatible
Item
PROFIBUS-DP station type
AnS series
Q series module
A1SJ71PB93D
QJ71PB93D
Slave station (Complies with EN50170 Volume 2 (Part 1, 2, 3, 4, 8))
0 to 125
Max. number of data that
may be communicated
Number of I/O data is 192 words in total.
(Size of I/O data is up to 122 words.)
Transmission specifications
Station numbers that may
be set
Electrical standard/
characteristics
Complies with EIA-RS485
Medium
Shielded twisted pair cable
Terminating
resistor
When diverting the existing
cable, use a connector with
Mounted by user (terminal node only)
built-in terminating resistor.*2
Network topology
Bus topology (Tree topology when repeaters are used)
Data link method
Polling method
Encoding method
NRZ
9.6kbps to 12Mbps*1
Transmission speed
Transmission distance
Differs depending on the transmission speed*1
Max. No. of repeaters
3 repeaters
Number of connectable
modules
(Per segment)
32 modules (including repeaters)
Flash ROM write count
Number of occupied I/O
points
: Partly changed ×: Incompatible
CompatPrecautions for replacement
ibility
Max. 10,000 times
32 points
(I/O assignment : 32 special points)
32 points
(I/O assignment: 32 intelligent points)
5VDC internal current
consumption
0.36A
0.44A
Weight
0.18kg
0.11kg
*1
For details of the transmission speed and transmission distance, refer to Section 9.2.1.
*2
For details of the terminating resistor, refer to Section 9.2.1.
5VDC internal current
consumption
needs to be recalculated.
9 - 12
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.3.2 Function list
Item
I/O data communication
function
Description
AnS
Q
Precautions for replacement
-
For prevention of data
inconsistency, change the
FROM/TO instructions to auto
refresh setting or dedicated
instructions.
This function works as a PROFIBUS-DP slave station to communicate I/O data with the
class 1 master station.
Communication of the following number of points is possible per module.
• Input data: Max. 122 words
• Output data: Max. 122 words
Max. total: 192 words
Global control function
By sending services (SYNC, UNSYNC, FREEZE, UNFREEZE) to each DP-Slave in a
group, synchronous control of DP-Slave I/O data is available.
Data swap function
This function swaps the upper and lower bytes in word units when I/O data is sent and
received.
When I/O data are read from or written to the buffer memory, this function prevents the I/O data
from being separated and incorrectly mixed.
Data consistency function
• Automatic refresh setting (GX Configurator-DP)
• Dedicated instructions (BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions)
-
• FROM/TO instructions
Set the operation mode.
Operation mode
Setting by configurator
software
9 - 13
Normal operation
mode
The slave parameters that have been set in the master station
are used for communication.
Communication is enabled when the slave parameters are
within the setting ranges. (Setting only a station number)
Self-diagnosis
mode
Hardware failure diagnostics is performed in standalone mode.
Communication with the master station is not performed.
Slave parameters and I/O data auto refresh can be set with configurator software GX
Configurator-DP.
-
Configurator software GX
Configurator-DP makes setting
easy although it is not required.
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.3.3 Parameter Setting to Master Station
The QJ71PB93D GSD file and parameters need to be written to the master station using configurator
software.
If QJ71PB93D GSD file and parameters have already been written to the master station, they do not
need to be written again.
For details of setting method, refer to the manual of configurator software GX Configurator-DP used.
Item
Description
Station No.
(FDL Address)
Set the station number of A1SJ71PB93D/QJ71PB93D.
Setting range: 0 to 125
Communication watch dog timer
(Watchdog)
Set the watchdog timer period of the communication watchdog timer.
The A1SJ71PB93D/QJ71PB93D detects a communication error if data cannot be received from the
master station within the configured time.
If the communication watchdog timer has not been set, no error is detected.
Setting range: 2 to 65025 (set value × 10ms)
Minimum response time
(min T_sdr)
Set the minimum response time during which the response frame issent from the A1SJ71PB93D/
QJ71PB93D to the master station.
Usually the default value is used.
Setting range: 1 to 255
Group identification number
(Group identification number)
Specify groups (Grp1 to Grp8) to which the A1SJ71PB93D/QJ71PB93D belongs.
Multiple groups (Grp1 to Grp8) can be set.
Data module setting
Set the I/O configuration information (set to "Cfg_Data" of the master station)
• Setting type: 96 patterns
• Number of setting: 1 to 40
Data assignment mode setting
Set the data layout of the output receive area/input send area of the buffer memory (set to
"User_Prm_Data" of the master station)
• Setting range
0: LUMP mode (default)
1: DIVIDED mode
Swap setting
Set whether the word data sent/received on the A1SJ71PB93D/QJ71PB93D side will be swapped or
not (set to "User_Prm_Data" of the master station)
• Setting range
0: Without swap (default)
1: With swap
9 - 14
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.3.4 Input/output signal comparison
(1) Input signal
Of the input signals, the "watchdog timer error signal" changes from X0D of A1SJ71PB93D to "X00" of
QJ71PB93D. Existing programs need to be corrected when diverted.
Signal name
Input
signal
A1SJ71PB93D
QJ71PB93D
Compatibility
Remarks
X00
Use prohibited
Watchdog timer error
×
The device numbers of the same function are
different.
X01
I/O communication signal
X02
Extension trouble notification completion signal
X03
Module error signal
X04
Use prohibited
X05
SYNC mode signal
X06
SYNC receive signal
X07
FREEZE mode signal
X08
Use prohibited
X09
-
BBLKRD start request acceptance
completion signal
X0A
X0B
-
Use prohibited
X0C
X0D
Watchdog timer error
×
Use prohibited
X0E
X0F
Dedicated instruction compatible signal
added to QJ71PB93D
BBLKWR start request acceptance
completion signal
Use prohibited
-
X10
X11
Operation mode change completion signal
X12
Use prohibited
X13
Station number change completion signal
X14
X15
X16
X17
X18
Use prohibited
-
X19
X1A
X1B
X1C
X1D
X1E
X1F
9 - 15
Module READY signal
Use prohibited
-
The device numbers of the same function are
different.
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
(2) Output signal
The output signals of A1SJ71PB93D and QJ71PB93D are the same except the function of "Y0A/0B:
dedicated instruction compatible signal" that has been added. Existing programs do not need to be
corrected when diverted (dedicated instructions are not used).
Output
signal
Y00
Signal name
A1SJ71PB93D
QJ71PB93D
Compatibility
Remarks
Input send area refresh directive signal
Y01
Use prohibited
Y02
Extension trouble notification request signal
Y03
Module error reset request signal
Y04
Y05
Y06
Use prohibited
Y07
-
Y08
Y09
Y0A
BBLKRD start request signal
Use prohibited
Y0B
Dedicated instruction compatible signal
added to QJ71PB93D
BBLKWR start request signal
Y0C
Y0D
Use prohibited
Y0E
-
Y0F
Y10
Y11
Operation mode change request signal
Y12
Use prohibited
Y13
Station number change request signal
Y14
Y15
Y16
Y17
Y18
Y19
Y1A
Use prohibited
-
Y1B
Y1C
Y1D
Y1E
Y1F
9 - 16
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.3.5 Buffer memory comparison
Address
Decimal
(hexadecimal)
Description
A1SJ71PB93D
QJ71PB93D
0000 to 0191
(000H to 0BFH)
Output receive area
(Stores the output data received from the master station. (Max. usable range 122 words))
0192 to 0255
(0C0H to 0FFH)
System area
(Use prohibited)
0256 to 0447
(100H to 1BFH)
Input send area
(Used to set the input data to be sent to the master station. (Max. usable range 122 words))
0448 to 0511
(1C0H to 1FFH)
System area
(Use prohibited)
0512
(200H)
Operation baud rate
(Stores the baud rate in current operation.)
0513
(201H)
Operation station number
(Stores the station number in current operation.)
0514
(202H)
Station number set on flash ROM
(Stores the station number saved on the flash ROM.)
0515
(203H)
Station number change request area
(Used to set a new station number to be set in response to the station number change
request signal (Y13).)
0516
(204H)
Station number rewritable count to flash ROM
(Stores the remaining number of times when the station number can be saved onto the
flash ROM during continuous operation.)
0517 to 2039
(205H to 7F7H)
System area
(Use prohibited)
2040
(7F8H)
Module error information
(Stores the error code detected by the A1SJ71PB93D/QJ71PB93D.)
2041 to 2053
(7F9H to 805H)
Extension trouble information area
(Used to set the extension trouble notification data to the master station.)
2054 to 2253
(806H to 8CDH)
System area
(Use prohibited)
2254
(8CEH)
Current operation mode
(Stores the operation mode in current operation.)
2255
(8CFH)
Operation mode change request area
(Used to set a new operation mode to be set in response to the operation mode change
request signal (Y11).)
2256
(8D0H)
Operation mode change result
(Stores the result of changing the operation mode in response to the operation mode
change request signal (Y11).)
2257
(8D1H)
Current communication watchdog timer value
(Stores the communication watchdog timer value in current operation.)
2258
(8D2H)
System area
(Use prohibited)
Swapping function setting status
(Stores the setting status of the swapping function in current operation.)
2260 to 2271
(8D4H to 8DFH)
System area
(Use prohibited)
2272 to 2283
(8E0H to 8EBH)
Output receive area used status
(Stores the current used status of the output receive area.)
2284 to 2287
(8ECH to 8EFH)
System area
(Use prohibited)
2288 to 2299
(8F0H to 8FBH)
Input send area used status
(Stores the current used status of the input send area.)
2300 to 2815
(8FCH to AFFH)
System area
(Use prohibited)
Precautions for replacement
-
-
-
Self-diagnostic status type code display area
(Stores the diagnostic status type code at
the time of self-diagnostics.)
2259
(8D3H)
9 - 17
Compatibility
This area has been added to
QJ71PB93D.
-
-
-
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.3.6 Program diversion
This section describes the methods of diverting parameters and programs when replacing the existing
A1SJ71PB93D with QJ71PB93D.
(1) Slave parameter setting
The parameters of the existing module can be diverted by selecting/changing the slave module model
name to the alternative module model name using the configuration software GX Configurator-DP.
When configuration software GX Configurator-DP is used, a program for setting slave parameters is
required.
(2) GSD (DDB) file/parameter setting to Master Station
(a) In the case of a master station which can use configuration software GX Configurator-DP
The QJ71PB93D GSD file has already been incorporated into the configuration software GX
Configurator-DP.
The GSD file is thus not needed to be installed.
(b) When configurator software in the master station of another company
Contact your nearest branch or agency for the QJ71PB93D GSD (DDB) file.
(3) Data consistency function
The data consistency function guarantees data integrity when I/O data with the master station is read
or written.
The data consistency function of existing A1SJ71PB93D is implemented by reading/writing data with
the FROM/TO instructions. Alternative module QJ71PB93D implements that function in one of the
following.
Program correction or creation is required.
(a) Implementing data consistency using the dedicated instructions
Delete the existing FROM/TO instructions and create a new sequence program which reads/writes
data using the dedicated instructions.
• Dedicated instruction for reading input data: BBLKRD
• Dedicated instruction for writing output data: BBLKWR
The dedicated instructions read or write I/O data while keeping data consistency.
(b) Implementing data consistency using the auto refresh function
Delete the existing FROM/TO instructions and set the parameters for the auto refresh function using
GX Configurator-DP.
The auto refresh function set by parameters read or write I/O data while keeping data consistency.
Point
For details of the auto refresh function and dedicated instructions for data consistency, refer to the
"PROFIBUS-DP Salve Module User's Manual".
9 - 18
9
PROFIBUS-DP MODULE REPLACEMENT
(4) Notes on diverting sequence programs
(a) Data consistency program
As written in (3), delete the FROM/TO instructions read/write I/O data, and replace them with the auto
refresh function set by parameters or the dedicated instructions.
Note that when changing to the dedicated instructions, a program which turns on the signal "Y0A/0B"
to enable the dedicated instructions need to be created additionally.
If data consistency is not taken into consideration, existing programs can be used without
modification.
(b) Input/output signals XY
• Watchdog timer error signal
Watchdog timer error signals are assigned differently as follows.
Existing programs need to be modified when diverted.
Signal name
A1SJ71PB93D
QJ71PB93D
Watchdog timer error signal
X0D
X00
(c) Buffer memory address
The buffer memory configurations of the existing module and alternative module are the same except
the self-diagnostics status type code display area, which is an additional function.
The FROM/TO instructions of the sequence program do not need to be modified.
9 - 19
10
REPLACEMENT OF OTHER MODULES
10
REPLACEMENT OF OTHER
MODULES
10
Some of the modules other than those introduced in the previous chapters "have no alternative
modules" or "are different in functions or specifications" and require consideration of alternatives for
replacement to the Q series. This chapter describes these modules.
Product name
Serial communication module
(module function)
Modem interface module
Memory card/Centronics interface
module
Model
AJ71QC24N
AJ71QC24N-R2
A1SJ71QC24N1
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
A6TEL
Q6TEL
AD59
AD35ID1
ID interface module
AD35ID2
A1SD35ID1
A1SD35ID2
Alternative/consideration
Consider replacement to the modem function of QJ71C24N/QJ71C24N-R2.
For details of the modem function, refer to the "MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module
User's Manual (Application)"
Consider replacement by the modem function of QJ71C24N(-R2).
No Centronics interface module is not available.
Consider to change the communication system to such as RS-232.
When a memory card is used, set a file register on the memory card or standard RAM for
substitution.
There is no alternative model.
Consider to change to a partner maker product (ID system BIS M series manufactured by Balluff
Inc.)
For details, refer to "Technical bulletin: FA-A-0062".
10 - 1
10
REPLACEMENT OF OTHER MODULES
Memo
10 - 2
11
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
11
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
11
11.1External Dimensions
For the external dimensions of each module described in this handbook, refer to the user’s manual of
each module.
For the external dimensions of base units, refer to the following handbooks.
No.
1
2
Handbook
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q
Series Handbook
Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series
to Q Series Handbook
Handbook Number
Module to be replaced
A/QnA AnS/QnAS
Q
L08043ENG
L08219ENG
×
×
11 - 1
11
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
Memo
11 - 2
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Spare Parts Storage
(1) The general specifications of programmable controllers are as follows. Please do not store
spare parts under a high temperature or high humidity condition, even within the range
guaranteed by the specifications.
Storage ambient temperature
Storage ambient humidity
-20 to 75 °C
10 to 90%, no condensation
(2) Store in a place avoiding direct sunlight.
(3) Store under a condition with no dust or corrosive gas.
(4) The capacity of the batteries (such as an A6BAT battery and an A8BAT battery) or a lithium
coin battery (commercially available) for memory card is decreased by its self-discharging
even when it is not used. Replace it with new one in 5 years as a guideline.
(5) Among power supply modules or CPU modules with built-in power supply that use any
aluminum electrolytic capacitor, the characteristics of the modules listed below will be
deteriorated if they are left un-energized for a long time. Therefore, take the following
measures.
Product
Model
A1NCPU, A1NCPUP21, A1NCPUR21, A1NCPUP21-S3, A2CCPU,
CPU module
A2CCPUP21, A2CCPUR21, A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF,
(Power supply built-in type)
A2CJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A61P, A61PEU, A61P-UL, A62P, A62PEU, A63P, A68P, A61RP,
Power supply module
A67RP, A2CJ66P
A1S61PN, A1S62PN, A1S63P
A62DA, A62DA-S1
A1S64AD, A1S68AD, A1S62DA, A1S68DAI, A1S68DAV,
Analog module
A1S63ADA, A1S66ADA
[Measures for preventing aluminum electrolytic capacitor characteristics deterioration]
Apply the rated voltage to the aluminum electrolytic capacitor for several hours to activate it. Or,
rotate products at the periodic inspection (in every 1 to 2 years).
[Reference]
The life of an aluminum electrolytic capacitor, even if not used and under a normal temperature,
decreases approximately 4 times slowly than the case when it is energized.
App - 1
Appendix 2 Procedure for Replacing the A1SD51S with the QD51(-R24)
The following is the procedure for replacing the A1SD51S with the QD51(-R24).
START
Connect a console and an external device to the QD51(-R24).
Refer to Appendix 2 (1)
Connect GX Developer to the CPU module.
In GX Developer, configure the intelligent function module switch
settings for the QD51(-R24).
Set Switch 2 to 0004H (Programming mode).
Refer to Appendix 2 (2)
Modify the BASIC program that has been used for the A1SD51S.
Refer to Section 4.6.2
Modify the sequence program.
Refer to Appendix 2 (4)
Debug the programs.
In the QD51(-R24) intelligent function module switch setting
dialog box of GX Developer, change the Switch 2 value to any
of 0000H to 0003H (Run mode or Multitask debug mode).
END
App - 2
Refer to Appendix 2 (2)
(1) Connecting a console and an external device to the QD51(-R24)
(a) Connection to the RS-232 interface
Since the same RS-232 interface specifications are applied to the QD51(-R24) and the A1SD51S,
the existing cable and RS-232 converter can be reused.
(b) Connection to the RS-422/485 interface
Because the QD51(-R24) uses a two-piece terminal block, the existing connector for the A1SD51S
cannot be reused. In addition, wiring must be checked and changed since the signals are assigned to
different positions.
For connection details, refer to the Q Corresponding Intelligent Communication Module User's
Manual, "RS-232 Interface Specifications".
(2) Setting the mode
The mode of the QD51(-R24) is set in the intelligent function module setting dialog box of GX Developer
while the mode of the A1SD51S is set with the mode setting switch on the module.
App - 3
(a) Switch 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Bit
Contents
position
b0
b1
Console
b3
Not used
b4
Console, debugger type
b5
Ctrl + C setting
b6
Not used
Access possible time setting after Y reset
b7
ON(1)
Refer to *1
Channel setting
Software
b2
OFF(0)
Not used
Used
Fixed on OFF
VT
VG
Disabled
Enabled
Fixed on OFF
200 ms
2000 ms
OFF(0)
ON(1)
*1 Console (Channel setting)
Bit position
Contents
b1
b0
OFF
OFF
Without console
OFF
ON
With console CH.1
ON
OFF
With console CH.2
ON
ON
Setting impossible
bF bE bD bC bB bA b9 b8
Bit
Contents
position
b8
Not used
b9
Flash ROM write protection setting
bA
bB
Debugger
bE
bF
Without
Not used
bC
bD
Fixed on OFF
With
Fixed on OFF
Channel setting
Software
Refer to *2
Not used
Not used
Used
Fixed on OFF
*2 Debugger (Channel setting)
Bit position
bD
bC
OFF
OFF
Contents
Without a debugger
OFF
ON
With debugger CH.1
ON
OFF
With debugger CH.2
ON
ON
Setting impossible
(b) Switch 2
Set value
0000H
0001H
0002H
0003H
0004H
0005H to 000FH
App - 4
Description
Remark
Run mode
Mode for executing the BASIC program.
Multitask debug mode
Mode for debugging by connecting a debugger.
Programming mode
Mode for programming by connecting a console.
Setting prohibited
-
(c) Switch 3 to Switch 5
Set 0000H.
(3) Modifying the BASIC program used for the A1SD51S
Programs used for the A1SD51S can be utilized for the QD51(-R24).
However, modification of the BASIC program may be required since the following setting items may be
different between these models.
(4) Modifying the sequence program
When the Task start signal (Y19) has been used to start a task, add the YCHECK instruction in the
sequence program.
On the A1SD51S, an interrupt occurs upon turn-ON of the Task start signal (Y19), which starts a task.
The QD51(-R24) monitors the Task start signal (Y19) at intervals of 10ms for starting a task.
By executing the YCHECK command as shown below, the task can be started at the same timing as the
A1SD51S.
Start
Specify Task 1.
Specify Task start.
Execute Y check.
App - 5
Appendix 3 Relevant Manuals
Appendix 3.1 Replacement Handbooks
(1) Transition Guide
No.
Manual name
Manual No.
Model code
A (Large AnS (Small
Type)
1
2
Mitsubishi Programmable Controllers MELSEC-A/QnA
Series Transition Guide
Mitsubishi Programmable Controllers MELSEC-AnS/QnAS
Series Transition Guide
L(NA)08077E
L(NA)08236E
Type)
×
×
(2) Replacement Handbooks
No.
Manual name
Manual No.
Model code
A (Large AnS (Small
Type)
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to
1
Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals)
Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to
Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals)
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to
2
Q Series Handbook (Intelligent Function Modules)
Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to
Q Series Handbook (Intelligent Function Modules)
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS/QnAS
3
Series (Small Type) to Q Series Handbook (Network
×
L08043ENG
L08219ENG
×
×
L08046ENG
L08220ENG
Type)
×
L08048ENG
Modules)
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series, AnS/
4
5
6
7
8
QnAS Series (Small Type) to Q Series Handbook
(Communications)
Transition from MELSEC-A0J2H Series to Q Series
Handbook
Transition from MELSECNET/MINI-S3, A2C (I/O) to CC-Link
Handbook
Transition from MELSEC-I/OLINK to CC-Link/LT Handbook
Transition of CPUs in MELSEC Redundant System
Handbook (Transition from Q4ARCPU to QnPRHCPU)
L08050ENG
L08060ENG
L08061ENG
L08062ENG
L08117ENG
×
(3) Transition Examples
No.
Manual name
Manual No.
Model code
A (Large AnS (Small
Type)
1
App - 6
MELSEC-A/QnA (Large), AnS/QnAS (Small) Transition
Examples
L(NA)08121E
Type)
×
(4) Others
No.
Manual name
Manual No.
Model code
A (Large AnS (Small
Type)
1
2
3
Product discontinuation of the A1SD51S intelligent
communication module
Procedures for Replacing Positioning Module AD71 with
QD75
Precautions for replacing A/QnA (large type) series CPU with
Universal model QCPU
FA-A-0059
×
×
FA-A-0060
FA-A-0068
Type)
×
App - 7
Appendix 3.2 A/AnS series
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Manual name
Computer Link Module Guidebook
Computer Link Module User’s Manual
(Com.link func./Print.func.)
type AJ71C22S1 User's Manual
For A Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual
Intelligent communication module type AD51H-S3 User's
Manual
Type A1SD51S Intelligent communication module User's
Manual
Intelligent Communication Module type AD51-S3 User's
Manual
GPC-BASIC SUPPLEMENTARY
GPC-BASIC SUPPLEMENTARY
AD51H-BASIC Programming Manual (Command)
AD51H-BASIC Programming Manual (Debug and Compile)
AS-i Master module type A1SJ71AS92 User's Manual
A1SD59J-S2/MIF Memory Card Interface Module User's
Manual
ID Interface Module type AD35ID1, AD35ID2, A1SD35ID1,
A1SD35ID2 User's Manual
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 Master Module Type AJ71PT32-S3,
AJ71T32-S3, A1SJ71PT32-S3, A1SJ71T32-S3 User's Manual
MELSEC-I/O Link Remote I/O System Master Module type
AJ51T64/A1SJ51T64 User's Manual
Manual No.
SH-3510
Model code
13JE76
SH-3511
13JE77
IB-66269
SH-080192
13J789
13JR45
IB-66401
13JE16
IB-66551
13JE90
IB-66189
13J655
IB-66214
IB-66100
SH-080090
SH-080091
SH-080085
13J766
13J636
13JF63
13JF64
13JR15
SH-080056
13JR05
SH-080147
13JR35
IB-66565
13JE64
IB-66574
13J748
Manual No.
SH-3510
Model code
13JE76
IB-66612
13J825
SH-080146
13JR33
Appendix 3.3 QnA/QnAS series
No.
1
2
3
App - 8
Manual name
Computer Link Module Guidebook
Serial Communications Module User’s Manual
(Modem Function Additional Version)
For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
Appendix 3.4 Q series
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Manual name
Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User’s
Manual (Basic)
Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User’s
Manual (Application)
Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol
Reference Manual
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
(Basic)
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
(Application)
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
(Web function)
GX Configurator-SC Version 2 Operating Manual
(Protocol FB support function)
Q Corresponding Intelligent Communication Module User's
Manual
AD51H-BASIC Programming Manual (Command)
AD51H-BASIC Programming Manual (Debug and Compile)
MODBUS(R) Interface Module User's Manual
MODBUS(R)/TCP Interface Module User's Manual
AS-i Master Module User's Manual QJ71AS92 GX
Configurator-AS (SW1D5C-QASU-E)
Manual No.
Model code
SH-080006
13JL86
SH-080007
13JL87
SH-080008
13JF89
SH-080009
13JL88
SH-080010
13JL89
SH-080180
13JR40
SH-080393E
13JU46
SH-080089
13JR16
SH-080090
SH-080091
SH-080578ENG
SH-080446ENG
13JF63
13JF64
13JR86
13JR71
SH-080291E
13JR53
App - 9
Memo
App - 10
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the
product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or
Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be
solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning,
maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months,
and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of
repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc.,
which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution
labels on the product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure
caused by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if
functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or
as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the
instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by
force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from
Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is
discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at
each FA Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any
cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures
of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for
accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user,
maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corp.
All other company names and product names used in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
L(NA)-08050ENG-F
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement